diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'stm32lib/src')
24 files changed, 16841 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_adc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_adc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..413c920 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_adc.c @@ -0,0 +1,1402 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_adc.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the ADC firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_adc.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ADC DISCNUM mask */
+#define CR1_DISCNUM_Reset ((u32)0xFFFF1FFF)
+
+/* ADC DISCEN mask */
+#define CR1_DISCEN_Set ((u32)0x00000800)
+#define CR1_DISCEN_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFF7FF)
+
+/* ADC JAUTO mask */
+#define CR1_JAUTO_Set ((u32)0x00000400)
+#define CR1_JAUTO_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFBFF)
+
+/* ADC JDISCEN mask */
+#define CR1_JDISCEN_Set ((u32)0x00001000)
+#define CR1_JDISCEN_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFEFFF)
+
+/* ADC AWDCH mask */
+#define CR1_AWDCH_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFE0)
+
+/* ADC Analog watchdog enable mode mask */
+#define CR1_AWDMode_Reset ((u32)0xFF3FFDFF)
+
+/* CR1 register Mask */
+#define CR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0xFFF0FEFF)
+
+/* ADC ADON mask */
+#define CR2_ADON_Set ((u32)0x00000001)
+#define CR2_ADON_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFFE)
+
+/* ADC DMA mask */
+#define CR2_DMA_Set ((u32)0x00000100)
+#define CR2_DMA_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFEFF)
+
+/* ADC RSTCAL mask */
+#define CR2_RSTCAL_Set ((u32)0x00000008)
+
+/* ADC CAL mask */
+#define CR2_CAL_Set ((u32)0x00000004)
+
+/* ADC SWSTART mask */
+#define CR2_SWSTART_Set ((u32)0x00400000)
+
+/* ADC EXTTRIG mask */
+#define CR2_EXTTRIG_Set ((u32)0x00100000)
+#define CR2_EXTTRIG_Reset ((u32)0xFFEFFFFF)
+
+/* ADC Software start mask */
+#define CR2_EXTTRIG_SWSTART_Set ((u32)0x00500000)
+#define CR2_EXTTRIG_SWSTART_Reset ((u32)0xFFAFFFFF)
+
+/* ADC JEXTSEL mask */
+#define CR2_JEXTSEL_Reset ((u32)0xFFFF8FFF)
+
+/* ADC JEXTTRIG mask */
+#define CR2_JEXTTRIG_Set ((u32)0x00008000)
+#define CR2_JEXTTRIG_Reset ((u32)0xFFFF7FFF)
+
+/* ADC JSWSTART mask */
+#define CR2_JSWSTART_Set ((u32)0x00200000)
+
+/* ADC injected software start mask */
+#define CR2_JEXTTRIG_JSWSTART_Set ((u32)0x00208000)
+#define CR2_JEXTTRIG_JSWSTART_Reset ((u32)0xFFDF7FFF)
+
+/* ADC TSPD mask */
+#define CR2_TSVREFE_Set ((u32)0x00800000)
+#define CR2_TSVREFE_Reset ((u32)0xFF7FFFFF)
+
+/* CR2 register Mask */
+#define CR2_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0xFFF1F7FD)
+
+/* ADC SQx mask */
+#define SQR3_SQ_Set ((u32)0x0000001F)
+#define SQR2_SQ_Set ((u32)0x0000001F)
+#define SQR1_SQ_Set ((u32)0x0000001F)
+
+/* SQR1 register Mask */
+#define SQR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0xFF0FFFFF)
+
+/* ADC JSQx mask */
+#define JSQR_JSQ_Set ((u32)0x0000001F)
+
+/* ADC JL mask */
+#define JSQR_JL_Set ((u32)0x00300000)
+#define JSQR_JL_Reset ((u32)0xFFCFFFFF)
+
+/* ADC SMPx mask */
+#define SMPR1_SMP_Set ((u32)0x00000007)
+#define SMPR2_SMP_Set ((u32)0x00000007)
+
+/* ADC JDRx registers offset */
+#define JDR_Offset ((u8)0x28)
+
+/* ADC1 DR register base address */
+#define DR_ADDRESS ((u32)0x4001244C)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the ADCx peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_DeInit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+
+ switch (*(u32*)&ADCx)
+ {
+ case ADC1_BASE:
+ /* Enable ADC1 reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1, ENABLE);
+ /* Release ADC1 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case ADC2_BASE:
+ /* Enable ADC2 reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC2, ENABLE);
+ /* Release ADC2 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC2, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case ADC3_BASE:
+ /* Enable ADC3 reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3, ENABLE);
+ /* Release ADC3 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_Init
+* Description : Initializes the ADCx peripheral according to the specified parameters
+* in the ADC_InitStruct.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_InitStruct: pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure that
+* contains the configuration information for the specified
+* ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_Init(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, ADC_InitTypeDef* ADC_InitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg1 = 0;
+ u8 tmpreg2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_MODE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_TRIG(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_DATA_ALIGN(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_LENGTH(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfChannel));
+
+ /*---------------------------- ADCx CR1 Configuration -----------------*/
+ /* Get the ADCx CR1 value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR1;
+ /* Clear DUALMOD and SCAN bits */
+ tmpreg1 &= CR1_CLEAR_Mask;
+ /* Configure ADCx: Dual mode and scan conversion mode */
+ /* Set DUALMOD bits according to ADC_Mode value */
+ /* Set SCAN bit according to ADC_ScanConvMode value */
+ tmpreg1 |= (u32)(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Mode | ((u32)ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode << 8));
+ /* Write to ADCx CR1 */
+ ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg1;
+
+ /*---------------------------- ADCx CR2 Configuration -----------------*/
+ /* Get the ADCx CR2 value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR2;
+ /* Clear CONT, ALIGN and EXTSEL bits */
+ tmpreg1 &= CR2_CLEAR_Mask;
+ /* Configure ADCx: external trigger event and continuous conversion mode */
+ /* Set ALIGN bit according to ADC_DataAlign value */
+ /* Set EXTSEL bits according to ADC_ExternalTrigConv value */
+ /* Set CONT bit according to ADC_ContinuousConvMode value */
+ tmpreg1 |= (u32)(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign | ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv |
+ ((u32)ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode << 1));
+ /* Write to ADCx CR2 */
+ ADCx->CR2 = tmpreg1;
+
+ /*---------------------------- ADCx SQR1 Configuration -----------------*/
+ /* Get the ADCx SQR1 value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR1;
+ /* Clear L bits */
+ tmpreg1 &= SQR1_CLEAR_Mask;
+ /* Configure ADCx: regular channel sequence length */
+ /* Set L bits according to ADC_NbrOfChannel value */
+ tmpreg2 |= (ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfChannel - 1);
+ tmpreg1 |= ((u32)tmpreg2 << 20);
+ /* Write to ADCx SQR1 */
+ ADCx->SQR1 = tmpreg1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each ADC_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : ADC_InitStruct : pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_StructInit(ADC_InitTypeDef* ADC_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* Reset ADC init structure parameters values */
+ /* Initialize the ADC_Mode member */
+ ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Mode = ADC_Mode_Independent;
+
+ /* initialize the ADC_ScanConvMode member */
+ ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Initialize the ADC_ContinuousConvMode member */
+ ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Initialize the ADC_ExternalTrigConv member */
+ ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv = ADC_ExternalTrigConv_T1_CC1;
+
+ /* Initialize the ADC_DataAlign member */
+ ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign = ADC_DataAlign_Right;
+
+ /* Initialize the ADC_NbrOfChannel member */
+ ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfChannel = 1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_Cmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified ADC peripheral.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the ADCx peripheral. This parameter
+* can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the ADON bit to wake up the ADC from power down mode */
+ ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_ADON_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC peripheral */
+ ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_ADON_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_DMACmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified ADC DMA request.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Note: ADC2 hasn't a DMA capability.
+* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC DMA transfer.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_DMACmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_DMA_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC DMA request */
+ ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_DMA_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC DMA request */
+ ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_DMA_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified ADC interrupts.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt sources to be enabled
+* or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt mask
+* - ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt mask
+* - ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt mask
+* - NewState: new state of the specified ADC interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_ITConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u16 ADC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ u8 itmask = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT));
+
+ /* Get the ADC IT index */
+ itmask = (u8)ADC_IT;
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC interrupts */
+ ADCx->CR1 |= itmask;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC interrupts */
+ ADCx->CR1 &= (~(u32)itmask);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_ResetCalibration
+* Description : Resets the selected ADC calibration registers.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_ResetCalibration(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+
+ /* Resets the selected ADC calibartion registers */
+ ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_RSTCAL_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetResetCalibrationStatus
+* Description : Gets the selected ADC reset calibration registers status.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of ADC reset calibration registers (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus ADC_GetResetCalibrationStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+
+ /* Check the status of RSTCAL bit */
+ if ((ADCx->CR2 & CR2_RSTCAL_Set) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* RSTCAL bit is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* RSTCAL bit is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the RSTCAL bit status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_StartCalibration
+* Description : Starts the selected ADC calibration process.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_StartCalibration(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+
+ /* Enable the selected ADC calibration process */
+ ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_CAL_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetCalibrationStatus
+* Description : Gets the selected ADC calibration status.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of ADC calibration (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus ADC_GetCalibrationStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+
+ /* Check the status of CAL bit */
+ if ((ADCx->CR2 & CR2_CAL_Set) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* CAL bit is set: calibration on going */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* CAL bit is reset: end of calibration */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the CAL bit status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_SoftwareStartConvCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the selected ADC software start conversion .
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC software start conversion.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_SoftwareStartConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC conversion on external event and start the selected
+ ADC conversion */
+ ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_EXTTRIG_SWSTART_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC conversion on external event and stop the selected
+ ADC conversion */
+ ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_EXTTRIG_SWSTART_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetSoftwareStartConvStatus
+* Description : Gets the selected ADC Software start conversion Status.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of ADC software start conversion (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus ADC_GetSoftwareStartConvStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+
+ /* Check the status of SWSTART bit */
+ if ((ADCx->CR2 & CR2_SWSTART_Set) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* SWSTART bit is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* SWSTART bit is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the SWSTART bit status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig
+* Description : Configures the discontinuous mode for the selected ADC regular
+* group channel.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - Number: specifies the discontinuous mode regular channel
+* count value. This number must be between 1 and 8.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 Number)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg1 = 0;
+ u32 tmpreg2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_DISC_NUMBER(Number));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR1;
+ /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 &= CR1_DISCNUM_Reset;
+ /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg2 = Number - 1;
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << 13;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_DiscModeCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the discontinuous mode on regular group
+* channel for the specified ADC
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC discontinuous mode
+* on regular group channel.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_DiscModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC regular discontinuous mode */
+ ADCx->CR1 |= CR1_DISCEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC regular discontinuous mode */
+ ADCx->CR1 &= CR1_DISCEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_RegularChannelConfig
+* Description : Configures for the selected ADC regular channel its corresponding
+* rank in the sequencer and its sample time.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected
+* - Rank: The rank in the regular group sequencer. This parameter
+* must be between 1 to 16.
+* - ADC_SampleTime: The sample time value to be set for the
+* selected channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_SampleTime_1Cycles5: Sample time equal to 1.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_7Cycles5: Sample time equal to 7.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_13Cycles5: Sample time equal to 13.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_28Cycles5: Sample time equal to 28.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_41Cycles5: Sample time equal to 41.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_55Cycles5: Sample time equal to 55.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_71Cycles5: Sample time equal to 71.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_239Cycles5: Sample time equal to 239.5 cycles
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_RegularChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_Channel, u8 Rank, u8 ADC_SampleTime)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_RANK(Rank));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_SAMPLE_TIME(ADC_SampleTime));
+
+ /* if ADC_Channel_10 ... ADC_Channel_17 is selected */
+ if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_9)
+ {
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR1;
+ /* Calculate the mask to clear */
+ tmpreg2 = SMPR1_SMP_Set << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10));
+ /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to set */
+ tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10));
+ /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->SMPR1 = tmpreg1;
+ }
+ else /* ADC_Channel include in ADC_Channel_[0..9] */
+ {
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to clear */
+ tmpreg2 = SMPR2_SMP_Set << (3 * ADC_Channel);
+ /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to set */
+ tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * ADC_Channel);
+ /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->SMPR2 = tmpreg1;
+ }
+ /* For Rank 1 to 6 */
+ if (Rank < 7)
+ {
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR3;
+ /* Calculate the mask to clear */
+ tmpreg2 = SQR3_SQ_Set << (5 * (Rank - 1));
+ /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to set */
+ tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 1));
+ /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->SQR3 = tmpreg1;
+ }
+ /* For Rank 7 to 12 */
+ else if (Rank < 13)
+ {
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to clear */
+ tmpreg2 = SQR2_SQ_Set << (5 * (Rank - 7));
+ /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to set */
+ tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 7));
+ /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->SQR2 = tmpreg1;
+ }
+ /* For Rank 13 to 16 */
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR1;
+ /* Calculate the mask to clear */
+ tmpreg2 = SQR1_SQ_Set << (5 * (Rank - 13));
+ /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to set */
+ tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 13));
+ /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->SQR1 = tmpreg1;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_ExternalTrigConvCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the ADCx conversion through external trigger.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC external trigger
+* start of conversion.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_ExternalTrigConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC conversion on external event */
+ ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_EXTTRIG_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC conversion on external event */
+ ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_EXTTRIG_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetConversionValue
+* Description : Returns the last ADCx conversion result data for regular channel.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The Data conversion value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 ADC_GetConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+
+ /* Return the selected ADC conversion value */
+ return (u16) ADCx->DR;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetDualModeConversionValue
+* Description : Returns the last ADC1 and ADC2 conversion result data in dual mode.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The Data conversion value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 ADC_GetDualModeConversionValue(void)
+{
+ /* Return the dual mode conversion value */
+ return (*(vu32 *) DR_ADDRESS);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the selected ADC automatic injected group
+* conversion after regular one.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC auto injected
+* conversion
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC automatic injected group conversion */
+ ADCx->CR1 |= CR1_JAUTO_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC automatic injected group conversion */
+ ADCx->CR1 &= CR1_JAUTO_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the discontinuous mode for injected group
+* channel for the specified ADC
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC discontinuous mode
+* on injected group channel.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC injected discontinuous mode */
+ ADCx->CR1 |= CR1_JDISCEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC injected discontinuous mode */
+ ADCx->CR1 &= CR1_JDISCEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvConfig
+* Description : Configures the ADCx external trigger for injected channels conversion.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv: specifies the ADC trigger to
+* start injected conversion.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T1_TRGO: Timer1 TRGO event
+* selected (for ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3)
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T1_CC4: Timer1 capture
+* compare4 selected (for ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3)
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T2_TRGO: Timer2 TRGO event
+* selected (for ADC1 and ADC2)
+* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T2_CC1: Timer2 capture
+* compare1 selected (for ADC1 and ADC2)
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T3_CC4: Timer3 capture
+* compare4 selected (for ADC1 and ADC2)
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T4_TRGO: Timer4 TRGO event
+* selected (for ADC1 and ADC2)
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_Ext_IT15_TIM8_CC4: External
+* interrupt line 15 or Timer8 capture compare4 event selected
+* (for ADC1 and ADC2)
+* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T4_CC3: Timer4 capture
+* compare3 selected (for ADC3 only)
+* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T8_CC2: Timer8 capture
+* compare2 selected (for ADC3 only)
+* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T8_CC4: Timer8 capture
+* compare4 selected (for ADC3 only)
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T5_TRGO: Timer5 TRGO event
+* selected (for ADC3 only)
+* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T5_CC4: Timer5 capture
+* compare4 selected (for ADC3 only)
+* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_None: Injected conversion
+* started by software and not by external trigger (for
+* ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3)
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u32 ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_INJEC_TRIG(ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = ADCx->CR2;
+ /* Clear the old external event selection for injected group */
+ tmpreg &= CR2_JEXTSEL_Reset;
+ /* Set the external event selection for injected group */
+ tmpreg |= ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the ADCx injected channels conversion
+* through external trigger
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC external trigger
+* start of injected conversion.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC external event selection for injected group */
+ ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_JEXTTRIG_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC external event selection for injected group */
+ ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_JEXTTRIG_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_SoftwareStartInjectedConvCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the selected ADC start of the injected
+* channels conversion.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC software start
+* injected conversion.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_SoftwareStartInjectedConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected ADC conversion for injected group on external event and start the selected
+ ADC injected conversion */
+ ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_JEXTTRIG_JSWSTART_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected ADC conversion on external event for injected group and stop the selected
+ ADC injected conversion */
+ ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_JEXTTRIG_JSWSTART_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetSoftwareStartInjectedConvCmdStatus
+* Description : Gets the selected ADC Software start injected conversion Status.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of ADC software start injected conversion (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus ADC_GetSoftwareStartInjectedConvCmdStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+
+ /* Check the status of JSWSTART bit */
+ if ((ADCx->CR2 & CR2_JSWSTART_Set) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* JSWSTART bit is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* JSWSTART bit is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the JSWSTART bit status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_InjectedChannelConfig
+* Description : Configures for the selected ADC injected channel its corresponding
+* rank in the sequencer and its sample time.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected
+* - Rank: The rank in the injected group sequencer. This parameter
+* must be between 1 to 4.
+* - ADC_SampleTime: The sample time value to be set for the
+* selected channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_SampleTime_1Cycles5: Sample time equal to 1.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_7Cycles5: Sample time equal to 7.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_13Cycles5: Sample time equal to 13.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_28Cycles5: Sample time equal to 28.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_41Cycles5: Sample time equal to 41.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_55Cycles5: Sample time equal to 55.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_71Cycles5: Sample time equal to 71.5 cycles
+* - ADC_SampleTime_239Cycles5: Sample time equal to 239.5 cycles
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_InjectedChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_Channel, u8 Rank, u8 ADC_SampleTime)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0, tmpreg3 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_RANK(Rank));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_SAMPLE_TIME(ADC_SampleTime));
+
+ /* if ADC_Channel_10 ... ADC_Channel_17 is selected */
+ if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_9)
+ {
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR1;
+ /* Calculate the mask to clear */
+ tmpreg2 = SMPR1_SMP_Set << (3*(ADC_Channel - 10));
+ /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to set */
+ tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_SampleTime << (3*(ADC_Channel - 10));
+ /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->SMPR1 = tmpreg1;
+ }
+ else /* ADC_Channel include in ADC_Channel_[0..9] */
+ {
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to clear */
+ tmpreg2 = SMPR2_SMP_Set << (3 * ADC_Channel);
+ /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to set */
+ tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * ADC_Channel);
+ /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->SMPR2 = tmpreg1;
+ }
+
+ /* Rank configuration */
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->JSQR;
+ /* Get JL value: Number = JL+1 */
+ tmpreg3 = (tmpreg1 & JSQR_JL_Set)>> 20;
+ /* Calculate the mask to clear: ((Rank-1)+(4-JL-1)) */
+ tmpreg2 = JSQR_JSQ_Set << (5 * (u8)((Rank + 3) - (tmpreg3 + 1)));
+ /* Clear the old JSQx bits for the selected rank */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2;
+ /* Calculate the mask to set: ((Rank-1)+(4-JL-1)) */
+ tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_Channel << (5 * (u8)((Rank + 3) - (tmpreg3 + 1)));
+ /* Set the JSQx bits for the selected rank */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->JSQR = tmpreg1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_InjectedSequencerLengthConfig
+* Description : Configures the sequencer length for injected channels
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - Length: The sequencer length.
+* This parameter must be a number between 1 to 4.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_InjectedSequencerLengthConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 Length)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg1 = 0;
+ u32 tmpreg2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_LENGTH(Length));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg1 = ADCx->JSQR;
+ /* Clear the old injected sequnence lenght JL bits */
+ tmpreg1 &= JSQR_JL_Reset;
+ /* Set the injected sequnence lenght JL bits */
+ tmpreg2 = Length - 1;
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << 20;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->JSQR = tmpreg1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_SetInjectedOffset
+* Description : Set the injected channels conversion value offset
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel: the ADC injected channel to set its
+* offset.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel_1: Injected Channel1 selected
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel_2: Injected Channel2 selected
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel_3: Injected Channel3 selected
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel_4: Injected Channel4 selected
+* - Offset: the offset value for the selected ADC injected channel
+* This parameter must be a 12bit value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_SetInjectedOffset(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_InjectedChannel, u16 Offset)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedChannel));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_OFFSET(Offset));
+
+ /* Set the selected injected channel data offset */
+ *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&ADCx) + ADC_InjectedChannel)) = (u32)Offset;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue
+* Description : Returns the ADC injected channel conversion result
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel: the converted ADC injected channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel_1: Injected Channel1 selected
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel_2: Injected Channel2 selected
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel_3: Injected Channel3 selected
+* - ADC_InjectedChannel_4: Injected Channel4 selected
+* Output : None
+* Return : The Data conversion value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_InjectedChannel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedChannel));
+
+ /* Returns the selected injected channel conversion data value */
+ return (u16) (*(vu32*) (((*(u32*)&ADCx) + ADC_InjectedChannel + JDR_Offset)));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the analog watchdog on single/all regular
+* or injected channels
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog: the ADC analog watchdog configuration.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegEnable: Analog watchdog on
+* a single regular channel
+* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on
+* a single injected channel
+* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegOrInjecEnable: Analog
+* watchdog on a single regular or injected channel
+* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegEnable: Analog watchdog on
+* all regular channel
+* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on
+* all injected channel
+* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegAllInjecEnable: Analog watchdog
+* on all regular and injected channels
+* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_None: No channel guarded by the
+* analog watchdog
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u32 ADC_AnalogWatchdog)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ANALOG_WATCHDOG(ADC_AnalogWatchdog));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = ADCx->CR1;
+ /* Clear AWDEN, AWDENJ and AWDSGL bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR1_AWDMode_Reset;
+ /* Set the analog watchdog enable mode */
+ tmpreg |= ADC_AnalogWatchdog;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_AnalogWatchdogThresholdsConfig
+* Description : Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - HighThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog High threshold value.
+* This parameter must be a 12bit value.
+* - LowThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold value.
+* This parameter must be a 12bit value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_AnalogWatchdogThresholdsConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u16 HighThreshold,
+ u16 LowThreshold)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_THRESHOLD(HighThreshold));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_THRESHOLD(LowThreshold));
+
+ /* Set the ADCx high threshold */
+ ADCx->HTR = HighThreshold;
+ /* Set the ADCx low threshold */
+ ADCx->LTR = LowThreshold;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig
+* Description : Configures the analog watchdog guarded single channel
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure for the analog
+* watchdog.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected
+* - ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_Channel)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = ADCx->CR1;
+ /* Clear the Analog watchdog channel select bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR1_AWDCH_Reset;
+ /* Set the Analog watchdog channel */
+ tmpreg |= ADC_Channel;
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_TempSensorVrefintCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the temperature sensor.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_TempSensorVrefintCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel*/
+ ADC1->CR2 |= CR2_TSVREFE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel*/
+ ADC1->CR2 &= CR2_TSVREFE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified ADC flag is set or not.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog flag
+* - ADC_FLAG_EOC: End of conversion flag
+* - ADC_FLAG_JEOC: End of injected group conversion flag
+* - ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Start of injected group conversion flag
+* - ADC_FLAG_STRT: Start of regular group conversion flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of ADC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus ADC_GetFlagStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_GET_FLAG(ADC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified ADC flag */
+ if ((ADCx->SR & ADC_FLAG) != (u8)RESET)
+ {
+ /* ADC_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* ADC_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the ADC_FLAG status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the ADCx's pending flags.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog flag
+* - ADC_FLAG_EOC: End of conversion flag
+* - ADC_FLAG_JEOC: End of injected group conversion flag
+* - ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Start of injected group conversion flag
+* - ADC_FLAG_STRT: Start of regular group conversion flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_ClearFlag(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_CLEAR_FLAG(ADC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the selected ADC flags */
+ ADCx->SR = ~(u32)ADC_FLAG;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified ADC interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt mask
+* - ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt mask
+* - ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt mask
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of ADC_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus ADC_GetITStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u16 ADC_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 itmask = 0, enablestatus = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_GET_IT(ADC_IT));
+
+ /* Get the ADC IT index */
+ itmask = ADC_IT >> 8;
+
+ /* Get the ADC_IT enable bit status */
+ enablestatus = (ADCx->CR1 & (u8)ADC_IT) ;
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified ADC interrupt */
+ if (((ADCx->SR & itmask) != (u32)RESET) && enablestatus)
+ {
+ /* ADC_IT is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* ADC_IT is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the ADC_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : ADC_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the ADCx’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral.
+* - ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt mask
+* - ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt mask
+* - ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt mask
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void ADC_ClearITPendingBit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u16 ADC_IT)
+{
+ u8 itmask = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx));
+ assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT));
+
+ /* Get the ADC IT index */
+ itmask = (u8)(ADC_IT >> 8);
+
+ /* Clear the selected ADC interrupt pending bits */
+ ADCx->SR = ~(u32)itmask;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_bkp.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_bkp.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6d3825 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_bkp.c @@ -0,0 +1,272 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_bkp.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the BKP firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_bkp.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ------------ BKP registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */
+#define BKP_OFFSET (BKP_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
+
+/* --- CR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of TPAL bit */
+#define CR_OFFSET (BKP_OFFSET + 0x30)
+#define TPAL_BitNumber 0x01
+#define CR_TPAL_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (TPAL_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of TPE bit */
+#define TPE_BitNumber 0x00
+#define CR_TPE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (TPE_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* --- CSR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of TPIE bit */
+#define CSR_OFFSET (BKP_OFFSET + 0x34)
+#define TPIE_BitNumber 0x02
+#define CSR_TPIE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (TPIE_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of TIF bit */
+#define TIF_BitNumber 0x09
+#define CSR_TIF_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (TIF_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of TEF bit */
+#define TEF_BitNumber 0x08
+#define CSR_TEF_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (TEF_BitNumber * 4))
+
+
+/* ---------------------- BKP registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+/* RTCCR register bit mask */
+#define RTCCR_CAL_Mask ((u16)0xFF80)
+#define RTCCR_Mask ((u16)0xFC7F)
+
+/* CSR register bit mask */
+#define CSR_CTE_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define CSR_CTI_Set ((u16)0x0002)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the BKP peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_DeInit(void)
+{
+ RCC_BackupResetCmd(ENABLE);
+ RCC_BackupResetCmd(DISABLE);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_TamperPinLevelConfig
+* Description : Configures the Tamper Pin active level.
+* Input : - BKP_TamperPinLevel: specifies the Tamper Pin active level.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - BKP_TamperPinLevel_High: Tamper pin active on high level
+* - BKP_TamperPinLevel_Low: Tamper pin active on low level
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_TamperPinLevelConfig(u16 BKP_TamperPinLevel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_BKP_TAMPER_PIN_LEVEL(BKP_TamperPinLevel));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CR_TPAL_BB = BKP_TamperPinLevel;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_TamperPinCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Tamper Pin activation.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the Tamper Pin activation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_TamperPinCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CR_TPE_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the Tamper Pin Interrupt.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the Tamper Pin Interrupt.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_ITConfig(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CSR_TPIE_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_RTCOutputConfig
+* Description : Select the RTC output source to output on the Tamper pin.
+* Input : - BKP_RTCOutputSource: specifies the RTC output source.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - BKP_RTCOutputSource_None: no RTC output on the Tamper pin.
+* - BKP_RTCOutputSource_CalibClock: output the RTC clock
+* with frequency divided by 64 on the Tamper pin.
+* - BKP_RTCOutputSource_Alarm: output the RTC Alarm pulse
+* signal on the Tamper pin.
+* - BKP_RTCOutputSource_Second: output the RTC Second pulse
+* signal on the Tamper pin.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_RTCOutputConfig(u16 BKP_RTCOutputSource)
+{
+ u16 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_BKP_RTC_OUTPUT_SOURCE(BKP_RTCOutputSource));
+
+ tmpreg = BKP->RTCCR;
+
+ /* Clear CCO, ASOE and ASOS bits */
+ tmpreg &= RTCCR_Mask;
+
+ /* Set CCO, ASOE and ASOS bits according to BKP_RTCOutputSource value */
+ tmpreg |= BKP_RTCOutputSource;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ BKP->RTCCR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_SetRTCCalibrationValue
+* Description : Sets RTC Clock Calibration value.
+* Input : - CalibrationValue: specifies the RTC Clock Calibration value.
+* This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x7F.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_SetRTCCalibrationValue(u8 CalibrationValue)
+{
+ u16 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_BKP_CALIBRATION_VALUE(CalibrationValue));
+
+ tmpreg = BKP->RTCCR;
+
+ /* Clear CAL[6:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= RTCCR_CAL_Mask;
+
+ /* Set CAL[6:0] bits according to CalibrationValue value */
+ tmpreg |= CalibrationValue;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ BKP->RTCCR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_WriteBackupRegister
+* Description : Writes user data to the specified Data Backup Register.
+* Input : - BKP_DR: specifies the Data Backup Register.
+* This parameter can be BKP_DRx where x:[1, 42]
+* - Data: data to write
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_WriteBackupRegister(u16 BKP_DR, u16 Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_BKP_DR(BKP_DR));
+
+ *(vu16 *) (BKP_BASE + BKP_DR) = Data;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_ReadBackupRegister
+* Description : Reads data from the specified Data Backup Register.
+* Input : - BKP_DR: specifies the Data Backup Register.
+* This parameter can be BKP_DRx where x:[1, 42]
+* Output : None
+* Return : The content of the specified Data Backup Register
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 BKP_ReadBackupRegister(u16 BKP_DR)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_BKP_DR(BKP_DR));
+
+ return (*(vu16 *) (BKP_BASE + BKP_DR));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the Tamper Pin Event flag is set or not.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of the Tamper Pin Event flag (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus BKP_GetFlagStatus(void)
+{
+ return (FlagStatus)(*(vu32 *) CSR_TEF_BB);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears Tamper Pin Event pending flag.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_ClearFlag(void)
+{
+ /* Set CTE bit to clear Tamper Pin Event flag */
+ BKP->CSR |= CSR_CTE_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the Tamper Pin Interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of the Tamper Pin Interrupt (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus BKP_GetITStatus(void)
+{
+ return (ITStatus)(*(vu32 *) CSR_TIF_BB);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : BKP_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears Tamper Pin Interrupt pending bit.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void BKP_ClearITPendingBit(void)
+{
+ /* Set CTI bit to clear Tamper Pin Interrupt pending bit */
+ BKP->CSR |= CSR_CTI_Set;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_can.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_can.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..afb472d --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_can.c @@ -0,0 +1,907 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_can.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the CAN firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_can.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* CAN Master Control Register bits */
+#define CAN_MCR_INRQ ((u32)0x00000001) /* Initialization request */
+#define CAN_MCR_SLEEP ((u32)0x00000002) /* Sleep mode request */
+#define CAN_MCR_TXFP ((u32)0x00000004) /* Transmit FIFO priority */
+#define CAN_MCR_RFLM ((u32)0x00000008) /* Receive FIFO locked mode */
+#define CAN_MCR_NART ((u32)0x00000010) /* No automatic retransmission */
+#define CAN_MCR_AWUM ((u32)0x00000020) /* Automatic wake up mode */
+#define CAN_MCR_ABOM ((u32)0x00000040) /* Automatic bus-off management */
+#define CAN_MCR_TTCM ((u32)0x00000080) /* time triggered communication */
+
+/* CAN Master Status Register bits */
+#define CAN_MSR_INAK ((u32)0x00000001) /* Initialization acknowledge */
+#define CAN_MSR_WKUI ((u32)0x00000008) /* Wake-up interrupt */
+#define CAN_MSR_SLAKI ((u32)0x00000010) /* Sleep acknowledge interrupt */
+
+/* CAN Transmit Status Register bits */
+#define CAN_TSR_RQCP0 ((u32)0x00000001) /* Request completed mailbox0 */
+#define CAN_TSR_TXOK0 ((u32)0x00000002) /* Transmission OK of mailbox0 */
+#define CAN_TSR_ABRQ0 ((u32)0x00000080) /* Abort request for mailbox0 */
+#define CAN_TSR_RQCP1 ((u32)0x00000100) /* Request completed mailbox1 */
+#define CAN_TSR_TXOK1 ((u32)0x00000200) /* Transmission OK of mailbox1 */
+#define CAN_TSR_ABRQ1 ((u32)0x00008000) /* Abort request for mailbox1 */
+#define CAN_TSR_RQCP2 ((u32)0x00010000) /* Request completed mailbox2 */
+#define CAN_TSR_TXOK2 ((u32)0x00020000) /* Transmission OK of mailbox2 */
+#define CAN_TSR_ABRQ2 ((u32)0x00800000) /* Abort request for mailbox2 */
+#define CAN_TSR_TME0 ((u32)0x04000000) /* Transmit mailbox 0 empty */
+#define CAN_TSR_TME1 ((u32)0x08000000) /* Transmit mailbox 1 empty */
+#define CAN_TSR_TME2 ((u32)0x10000000) /* Transmit mailbox 2 empty */
+
+/* CAN Receive FIFO 0 Register bits */
+#define CAN_RF0R_FULL0 ((u32)0x00000008) /* FIFO 0 full */
+#define CAN_RF0R_FOVR0 ((u32)0x00000010) /* FIFO 0 overrun */
+#define CAN_RF0R_RFOM0 ((u32)0x00000020) /* Release FIFO 0 output mailbox */
+
+/* CAN Receive FIFO 1 Register bits */
+#define CAN_RF1R_FULL1 ((u32)0x00000008) /* FIFO 1 full */
+#define CAN_RF1R_FOVR1 ((u32)0x00000010) /* FIFO 1 overrun */
+#define CAN_RF1R_RFOM1 ((u32)0x00000020) /* Release FIFO 1 output mailbox */
+
+/* CAN Error Status Register bits */
+#define CAN_ESR_EWGF ((u32)0x00000001) /* Error warning flag */
+#define CAN_ESR_EPVF ((u32)0x00000002) /* Error passive flag */
+#define CAN_ESR_BOFF ((u32)0x00000004) /* Bus-off flag */
+
+/* CAN Mailbox Transmit Request */
+#define CAN_TMIDxR_TXRQ ((u32)0x00000001) /* Transmit mailbox request */
+
+/* CAN Filter Master Register bits */
+#define CAN_FMR_FINIT ((u32)0x00000001) /* Filter init mode */
+
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+static ITStatus CheckITStatus(u32 CAN_Reg, u32 It_Bit);
+
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the CAN peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_DeInit(void)
+{
+ /* Enable CAN reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN, ENABLE);
+ /* Release CAN from reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_Init
+* Description : Initializes the CAN peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the CAN_InitStruct.
+* Input : CAN_InitStruct: pointer to a CAN_InitTypeDef structure that
+ contains the configuration information for the CAN peripheral.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : Constant indicates initialization succeed which will be
+* CANINITFAILED or CANINITOK.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 CAN_Init(CAN_InitTypeDef* CAN_InitStruct)
+{
+ u8 InitStatus = 0;
+ u16 WaitAck = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_MODE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_SJW(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_BS1(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_BS2(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_PRESCALER(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler));
+
+ /* Request initialisation */
+ CAN->MCR = CAN_MCR_INRQ;
+
+ /* ...and check acknowledged */
+ if ((CAN->MSR & CAN_MSR_INAK) == 0)
+ {
+ InitStatus = CANINITFAILED;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set the time triggered communication mode */
+ if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM == ENABLE)
+ {
+ CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_TTCM;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_TTCM;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the automatic bus-off management */
+ if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM == ENABLE)
+ {
+ CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_ABOM;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_ABOM;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the automatic wake-up mode */
+ if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM == ENABLE)
+ {
+ CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_AWUM;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_AWUM;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the no automatic retransmission */
+ if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART == ENABLE)
+ {
+ CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_NART;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_NART;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the receive FIFO locked mode */
+ if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM == ENABLE)
+ {
+ CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_RFLM;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_RFLM;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the transmit FIFO priority */
+ if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP == ENABLE)
+ {
+ CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_TXFP;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_TXFP;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the bit timing register */
+ CAN->BTR = (u32)((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode << 30) | ((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW << 24) |
+ ((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1 << 16) | ((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2 << 20) |
+ ((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler - 1);
+
+ InitStatus = CANINITOK;
+
+ /* Request leave initialisation */
+ CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_INRQ;
+
+ /* Wait the acknowledge */
+ for(WaitAck = 0x400; WaitAck > 0x0; WaitAck--)
+ {
+ }
+
+ /* ...and check acknowledged */
+ if ((CAN->MSR & CAN_MSR_INAK) == CAN_MSR_INAK)
+ {
+ InitStatus = CANINITFAILED;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* At this step, return the status of initialization */
+ return InitStatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_FilterInit
+* Description : Initializes the CAN peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the CAN_FilterInitStruct.
+* Input : CAN_FilterInitStruct: pointer to a CAN_FilterInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the configuration information.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_FilterInit(CAN_FilterInitTypeDef* CAN_FilterInitStruct)
+{
+ u16 FilterNumber_BitPos = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_NUMBER(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_MODE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_SCALE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_FIFO(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterActivation));
+
+ FilterNumber_BitPos =
+ (u16)((u16)0x0001 << ((u16)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber));
+
+ /* Initialisation mode for the filter */
+ CAN->FMR |= CAN_FMR_FINIT;
+
+ /* Filter Deactivation */
+ CAN->FA1R &= ~(u32)FilterNumber_BitPos;
+
+ /* Filter Scale */
+ if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale == CAN_FilterScale_16bit)
+ {
+ /* 16-bit scale for the filter */
+ CAN->FS1R &= ~(u32)FilterNumber_BitPos;
+
+ /* First 16-bit identifier and First 16-bit mask */
+ /* Or First 16-bit identifier and Second 16-bit identifier */
+ CAN->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR1 =
+ ((u32)((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdLow) << 16) |
+ ((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdLow);
+
+ /* Second 16-bit identifier and Second 16-bit mask */
+ /* Or Third 16-bit identifier and Fourth 16-bit identifier */
+ CAN->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR2 =
+ ((u32)((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdHigh) << 16) |
+ ((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdHigh);
+ }
+ if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale == CAN_FilterScale_32bit)
+ {
+ /* 32-bit scale for the filter */
+ CAN->FS1R |= FilterNumber_BitPos;
+
+ /* 32-bit identifier or First 32-bit identifier */
+ CAN->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR1 =
+ ((u32)((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdHigh) << 16) |
+ ((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdLow);
+
+ /* 32-bit mask or Second 32-bit identifier */
+ CAN->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR2 =
+ ((u32)((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdHigh) << 16) |
+ ((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdLow);
+
+ }
+
+ /* Filter Mode */
+ if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode == CAN_FilterMode_IdMask)
+ {
+ /*Id/Mask mode for the filter*/
+ CAN->FM1R &= ~(u32)FilterNumber_BitPos;
+ }
+ else /* CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode == CAN_FilterMode_IdList */
+ {
+ /*Identifier list mode for the filter*/
+ CAN->FM1R |= (u32)FilterNumber_BitPos;
+ }
+
+ /* Filter FIFO assignment */
+ if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment == CAN_FilterFIFO0)
+ {
+ /* FIFO 0 assignation for the filter */
+ CAN->FFA1R &= ~(u32)FilterNumber_BitPos;
+ }
+ if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment == CAN_FilterFIFO1)
+ {
+ /* FIFO 1 assignation for the filter */
+ CAN->FFA1R |= (u32)FilterNumber_BitPos;
+ }
+
+ /* Filter activation */
+ if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterActivation == ENABLE)
+ {
+ CAN->FA1R |= FilterNumber_BitPos;
+ }
+
+ /* Leave the initialisation mode for the filter */
+ CAN->FMR &= ~CAN_FMR_FINIT;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each CAN_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : CAN_InitStruct: pointer to a CAN_InitTypeDef structure which
+* will be initialized.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_StructInit(CAN_InitTypeDef* CAN_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* Reset CAN init structure parameters values */
+
+ /* Initialize the time triggered communication mode */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Initialize the automatic bus-off management */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Initialize the automatic wake-up mode */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Initialize the no automatic retransmission */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Initialize the receive FIFO locked mode */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Initialize the transmit FIFO priority */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Initialize the CAN_Mode member */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode = CAN_Mode_Normal;
+
+ /* Initialize the CAN_SJW member */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW = CAN_SJW_1tq;
+
+ /* Initialize the CAN_BS1 member */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1 = CAN_BS1_4tq;
+
+ /* Initialize the CAN_BS2 member */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2 = CAN_BS2_3tq;
+
+ /* Initialize the CAN_Prescaler member */
+ CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler = 1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified CAN interrupts.
+* Input : - CAN_IT: specifies the CAN interrupt sources to be enabled or
+* disabled.
+* This parameter can be: CAN_IT_TME, CAN_IT_FMP0, CAN_IT_FF0,
+* CAN_IT_FOV0, CAN_IT_FMP1, CAN_IT_FF1,
+* CAN_IT_FOV1, CAN_IT_EWG, CAN_IT_EPV,
+* CAN_IT_LEC, CAN_IT_ERR, CAN_IT_WKU or
+* CAN_IT_SLK.
+* - NewState: new state of the CAN interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_ITConfig(u32 CAN_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_ITConfig(CAN_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected CAN interrupt */
+ CAN->IER |= CAN_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected CAN interrupt */
+ CAN->IER &= ~CAN_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_Transmit
+* Description : Initiates the transmission of a message.
+* Input : TxMessage: pointer to a structure which contains CAN Id, CAN
+* DLC and CAN datas.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : The number of the mailbox that is used for transmission
+* or CAN_NO_MB if there is no empty mailbox.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 CAN_Transmit(CanTxMsg* TxMessage)
+{
+ u8 TransmitMailbox = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_STDID(TxMessage->StdId));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_EXTID(TxMessage->StdId));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_IDTYPE(TxMessage->IDE));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_RTR(TxMessage->RTR));
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_DLC(TxMessage->DLC));
+
+ /* Select one empty transmit mailbox */
+ if ((CAN->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME0) == CAN_TSR_TME0)
+ {
+ TransmitMailbox = 0;
+ }
+ else if ((CAN->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME1) == CAN_TSR_TME1)
+ {
+ TransmitMailbox = 1;
+ }
+ else if ((CAN->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME2) == CAN_TSR_TME2)
+ {
+ TransmitMailbox = 2;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ TransmitMailbox = CAN_NO_MB;
+ }
+
+ if (TransmitMailbox != CAN_NO_MB)
+ {
+ /* Set up the Id */
+ CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TIR &= CAN_TMIDxR_TXRQ;
+ if (TxMessage->IDE == CAN_ID_STD)
+ {
+ TxMessage->StdId &= (u32)0x000007FF;
+ TxMessage->StdId = TxMessage->StdId << 21;
+
+ CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TIR |= (TxMessage->StdId | TxMessage->IDE |
+ TxMessage->RTR);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ TxMessage->ExtId &= (u32)0x1FFFFFFF;
+ TxMessage->ExtId <<= 3;
+
+ CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TIR |= (TxMessage->ExtId | TxMessage->IDE |
+ TxMessage->RTR);
+ }
+
+ /* Set up the DLC */
+ TxMessage->DLC &= (u8)0x0000000F;
+ CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TDTR &= (u32)0xFFFFFFF0;
+ CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TDTR |= TxMessage->DLC;
+
+ /* Set up the data field */
+ CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TDLR = (((u32)TxMessage->Data[3] << 24) |
+ ((u32)TxMessage->Data[2] << 16) |
+ ((u32)TxMessage->Data[1] << 8) |
+ ((u32)TxMessage->Data[0]));
+ CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TDHR = (((u32)TxMessage->Data[7] << 24) |
+ ((u32)TxMessage->Data[6] << 16) |
+ ((u32)TxMessage->Data[5] << 8) |
+ ((u32)TxMessage->Data[4]));
+
+ /* Request transmission */
+ CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TIR |= CAN_TMIDxR_TXRQ;
+ }
+
+ return TransmitMailbox;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_TransmitStatus
+* Description : Checks the transmission of a message.
+* Input : TransmitMailbox: the number of the mailbox that is used for
+* transmission.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : CANTXOK if the CAN driver transmits the message, CANTXFAILED
+* in an other case.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 CAN_TransmitStatus(u8 TransmitMailbox)
+{
+ /* RQCP, TXOK and TME bits */
+ u8 State = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_TRANSMITMAILBOX(TransmitMailbox));
+
+ switch (TransmitMailbox)
+ {
+ case (0): State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_RQCP0) << 2);
+ State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TXOK0) >> 0);
+ State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TME0) >> 26);
+ break;
+ case (1): State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_RQCP1) >> 6);
+ State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TXOK1) >> 8);
+ State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TME1) >> 27);
+ break;
+ case (2): State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_RQCP2) >> 14);
+ State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TXOK2) >> 16);
+ State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TME2) >> 28);
+ break;
+ default:
+ State = CANTXFAILED;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ switch (State)
+ {
+ /* transmit pending */
+ case (0x0): State = CANTXPENDING;
+ break;
+ /* transmit failed */
+ case (0x5): State = CANTXFAILED;
+ break;
+ /* transmit succedeed */
+ case (0x7): State = CANTXOK;
+ break;
+ default:
+ State = CANTXFAILED;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ return State;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_CancelTransmit
+* Description : Cancels a transmit request.
+* Input : Mailbox number.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_CancelTransmit(u8 Mailbox)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_TRANSMITMAILBOX(Mailbox));
+
+ /* abort transmission */
+ switch (Mailbox)
+ {
+ case (0): CAN->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ0;
+ break;
+ case (1): CAN->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ1;
+ break;
+ case (2): CAN->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ2;
+ break;
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_FIFORelease
+* Description : Releases a FIFO.
+* Input : FIFONumber: FIFO to release, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_FIFORelease(u8 FIFONumber)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber));
+
+ /* Release FIFO0 */
+ if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO0)
+ {
+ CAN->RF0R = CAN_RF0R_RFOM0;
+ }
+ /* Release FIFO1 */
+ else /* FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO1 */
+ {
+ CAN->RF1R = CAN_RF1R_RFOM1;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_MessagePending
+* Description : Returns the number of pending messages.
+* Input : FIFONumber: Receive FIFO number, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : NbMessage which is the number of pending message.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 CAN_MessagePending(u8 FIFONumber)
+{
+ u8 MessagePending=0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber));
+
+ if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO0)
+ {
+ MessagePending = (u8)(CAN->RF0R&(u32)0x03);
+ }
+ else if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO1)
+ {
+ MessagePending = (u8)(CAN->RF1R&(u32)0x03);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ MessagePending = 0;
+ }
+ return MessagePending;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_Receive
+* Description : Receives a message.
+* Input : FIFONumber: Receive FIFO number, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1.
+* Output : RxMessage: pointer to a structure which contains CAN Id,
+* CAN DLC, CAN datas and FMI number.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_Receive(u8 FIFONumber, CanRxMsg* RxMessage)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber));
+
+ /* Get the Id */
+ RxMessage->IDE = (u8)0x04 & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR;
+ if (RxMessage->IDE == CAN_ID_STD)
+ {
+ RxMessage->StdId = (u32)0x000007FF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR >> 21);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RxMessage->ExtId = (u32)0x1FFFFFFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR >> 3);
+ }
+
+ RxMessage->RTR = (u8)0x02 & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR;
+
+ /* Get the DLC */
+ RxMessage->DLC = (u8)0x0F & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDTR;
+
+ /* Get the FMI */
+ RxMessage->FMI = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDTR >> 8);
+
+ /* Get the data field */
+ RxMessage->Data[0] = (u8)0xFF & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR;
+ RxMessage->Data[1] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 8);
+ RxMessage->Data[2] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 16);
+ RxMessage->Data[3] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 24);
+
+ RxMessage->Data[4] = (u8)0xFF & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR;
+ RxMessage->Data[5] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 8);
+ RxMessage->Data[6] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 16);
+ RxMessage->Data[7] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 24);
+
+ /* Release the FIFO */
+ CAN_FIFORelease(FIFONumber);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_Sleep
+* Description : Enters the low power mode.
+* Input : None.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : CANSLEEPOK if sleep entered, CANSLEEPFAILED in an other case.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 CAN_Sleep(void)
+{
+ u8 SleepStatus = 0;
+
+ /* Sleep mode entering request */
+ CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_SLEEP;
+ SleepStatus = CANSLEEPOK;
+
+ /* Sleep mode status */
+ if ((CAN->MCR&CAN_MCR_SLEEP) == 0)
+ {
+ /* Sleep mode not entered */
+ SleepStatus = CANSLEEPFAILED;
+ }
+
+ /* At this step, sleep mode status */
+ return SleepStatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_WakeUp
+* Description : Wakes the CAN up.
+* Input : None.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : CANWAKEUPOK if sleep mode left, CANWAKEUPFAILED in an other
+* case.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 CAN_WakeUp(void)
+{
+ u8 WakeUpStatus = 0;
+
+ /* Wake up request */
+ CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_SLEEP;
+ WakeUpStatus = CANWAKEUPFAILED;
+
+ /* Sleep mode status */
+ if ((CAN->MCR&CAN_MCR_SLEEP) == 0)
+ {
+ /* Sleep mode exited */
+ WakeUpStatus = CANWAKEUPOK;
+ }
+
+ /* At this step, sleep mode status */
+ return WakeUpStatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified CAN flag is set or not.
+* Input : CAN_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be: CAN_FLAG_EWG, CAN_FLAG_EPV or
+* CAN_FLAG_BOF.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : The new state of CAN_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus CAN_GetFlagStatus(u32 CAN_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FLAG(CAN_FLAG));
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified CAN flag */
+ if ((CAN->ESR & CAN_FLAG) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* CAN_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* CAN_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the CAN_FLAG status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the CAN's pending flags.
+* Input : CAN_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_ClearFlag(u32 CAN_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_FLAG(CAN_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the selected CAN flags */
+ CAN->ESR &= ~CAN_FLAG;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified CAN interrupt has occurred or
+* not.
+* Input : CAN_IT: specifies the CAN interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be: CAN_IT_RQCP0, CAN_IT_RQCP1, CAN_IT_RQCP2,
+* CAN_IT_FF0, CAN_IT_FOV0, CAN_IT_FF1,
+* CAN_IT_FOV1, CAN_IT_EWG, CAN_IT_EPV,
+* CAN_IT_BOF, CAN_IT_WKU or CAN_IT_SLK.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : The new state of CAN_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus CAN_GetITStatus(u32 CAN_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus pendingbitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_ITStatus(CAN_IT));
+
+ switch (CAN_IT)
+ {
+ case CAN_IT_RQCP0:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->TSR, CAN_TSR_RQCP0);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_RQCP1:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->TSR, CAN_TSR_RQCP1);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_RQCP2:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->TSR, CAN_TSR_RQCP2);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_FF0:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->RF0R, CAN_RF0R_FULL0);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_FOV0:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->RF0R, CAN_RF0R_FOVR0);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_FF1:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->RF1R, CAN_RF1R_FULL1);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_FOV1:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->RF1R, CAN_RF1R_FOVR1);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_EWG:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->ESR, CAN_ESR_EWGF);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_EPV:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->ESR, CAN_ESR_EPVF);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_BOF:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->ESR, CAN_ESR_BOFF);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_SLK:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->MSR, CAN_MSR_SLAKI);
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_WKU:
+ pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->MSR, CAN_MSR_WKUI);
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ pendingbitstatus = RESET;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the CAN_IT status */
+ return pendingbitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CAN_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the CAN’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : CAN_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CAN_ClearITPendingBit(u32 CAN_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CAN_ITStatus(CAN_IT));
+
+ switch (CAN_IT)
+ {
+ case CAN_IT_RQCP0:
+ CAN->TSR = CAN_TSR_RQCP0; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_RQCP1:
+ CAN->TSR = CAN_TSR_RQCP1; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_RQCP2:
+ CAN->TSR = CAN_TSR_RQCP2; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_FF0:
+ CAN->RF0R = CAN_RF0R_FULL0; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_FOV0:
+ CAN->RF0R = CAN_RF0R_FOVR0; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_FF1:
+ CAN->RF1R = CAN_RF1R_FULL1; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_FOV1:
+ CAN->RF1R = CAN_RF1R_FOVR1; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_EWG:
+ CAN->ESR &= ~ CAN_ESR_EWGF; /* rw */
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_EPV:
+ CAN->ESR &= ~ CAN_ESR_EPVF; /* rw */
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_BOF:
+ CAN->ESR &= ~ CAN_ESR_BOFF; /* rw */
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_WKU:
+ CAN->MSR = CAN_MSR_WKUI; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ case CAN_IT_SLK:
+ CAN->MSR = CAN_MSR_SLAKI; /* rc_w1*/
+ break;
+ default :
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CheckITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the CAN interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : CAN_Reg: specifies the CAN interrupt register to check.
+* It_Bit: specifies the interrupt source bit to check.
+* Output : None.
+* Return : The new state of the CAN Interrupt (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+static ITStatus CheckITStatus(u32 CAN_Reg, u32 It_Bit)
+{
+ ITStatus pendingbitstatus = RESET;
+
+ if ((CAN_Reg & It_Bit) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* CAN_IT is set */
+ pendingbitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* CAN_IT is reset */
+ pendingbitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ return pendingbitstatus;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_crc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_crc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac8c7c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_crc.c @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_crc.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the CRC firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_crc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* CR register bit mask */
+#define CR_RESET_Set ((u32)0x00000001)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CRC_ResetDR
+* Description : Resets the CRC Data register (DR).
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CRC_ResetDR(void)
+{
+ /* Reset CRC generator */
+ CRC->CR = CR_RESET_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CRC_CalcCRC
+* Description : Computes the 32-bit CRC of a given data word(32-bit).
+* Input : - Data: data word(32-bit) to compute its CRC
+* Output : None
+* Return : 32-bit CRC
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 CRC_CalcCRC(u32 Data)
+{
+ CRC->DR = Data;
+
+ return (CRC->DR);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CRC_CalcBlockCRC
+* Description : Computes the 32-bit CRC of a given buffer of data word(32-bit).
+* Input : - pBuffer: pointer to the buffer containing the data to be
+* computed
+* - BufferLength: length of the buffer to be computed
+* Output : None
+* Return : 32-bit CRC
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 CRC_CalcBlockCRC(u32 pBuffer[], u32 BufferLength)
+{
+ u32 index = 0;
+
+ for(index = 0; index < BufferLength; index++)
+ {
+ CRC->DR = pBuffer[index];
+ }
+
+ return (CRC->DR);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CRC_GetCRC
+* Description : Returns the current CRC value.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : 32-bit CRC
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 CRC_GetCRC(void)
+{
+ return (CRC->DR);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CRC_SetIDRegister
+* Description : Stores a 8-bit data in the Independent Data(ID) register.
+* Input : - IDValue: 8-bit value to be stored in the ID register
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void CRC_SetIDRegister(u8 IDValue)
+{
+ CRC->IDR = IDValue;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : CRC_GetIDRegister
+* Description : Returns the 8-bit data stored in the Independent Data(ID) register
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : 8-bit value of the ID register
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 CRC_GetIDRegister(void)
+{
+ return (CRC->IDR);
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dac.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dac.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..80eec1a --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dac.c @@ -0,0 +1,389 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_dac.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the DAC firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_dac.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* DAC EN mask */
+#define CR_EN_Set ((u32)0x00000001)
+
+/* DAC DMAEN mask */
+#define CR_DMAEN_Set ((u32)0x00001000)
+
+/* CR register Mask */
+#define CR_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0x00000FFE)
+
+/* DAC SWTRIG mask */
+#define SWTRIGR_SWTRIG_Set ((u32)0x00000001)
+
+/* DAC Dual Channels SWTRIG masks */
+#define DUAL_SWTRIG_Set ((u32)0x00000003)
+#define DUAL_SWTRIG_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFFC)
+
+/* DHR registers offsets */
+#define DHR12R1_Offset ((u32)0x00000008)
+#define DHR12R2_Offset ((u32)0x00000014)
+#define DHR12RD_Offset ((u32)0x00000020)
+
+/* DOR register offset */
+#define DOR_Offset ((u32)0x0000002C)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the DAC peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_DeInit(void)
+{
+ /* Enable DAC reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE);
+ /* Release DAC from reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_Init
+* Description : Initializes the DAC peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the DAC_InitStruct.
+* Input : - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected
+* - DAC_InitStruct: pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure that
+* contains the configuration information for the specified
+* DAC channel.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_Init(u32 DAC_Channel, DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the DAC parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_TRIGGER(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_GENERATE_WAVE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_LFSR_UNMASK_TRIANGLE_AMPLITUDE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_OUTPUT_BUFFER_STATE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer));
+
+/*---------------------------- DAC CR Configuration --------------------------*/
+ /* Get the DAC CR value */
+ tmpreg1 = DAC->CR;
+ /* Clear BOFFx, TENx, TSELx, WAVEx and MAMPx bits */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~(CR_CLEAR_Mask << DAC_Channel);
+ /* Configure for the selected DAC channel: buffer output, trigger, wave genration,
+ mask/amplitude for wave genration */
+ /* Set TSELx and TENx bits according to DAC_Trigger value */
+ /* Set WAVEx bits according to DAC_WaveGeneration value */
+ /* Set MAMPx bits according to DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude value */
+ /* Set BOFFx bit according to DAC_OutputBuffer value */
+ tmpreg2 = (DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger | DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration |
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude | DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer);
+ /* Calculate CR register value depending on DAC_Channel */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << DAC_Channel;
+ /* Write to DAC CR */
+ DAC->CR = tmpreg1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each DAC_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - DAC_InitStruct : pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_StructInit(DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct)
+{
+/*--------------- Reset DAC init structure parameters values -----------------*/
+ /* Initialize the DAC_Trigger member */
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger = DAC_Trigger_None;
+
+ /* Initialize the DAC_WaveGeneration member */
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration = DAC_WaveGeneration_None;
+
+ /* Initialize the DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude member */
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude = DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bit0;
+
+ /* Initialize the DAC_OutputBuffer member */
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_Cmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified DAC channel.
+* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected
+* - NewState: new state of the DAC channel.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_Cmd(u32 DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->CR |= CR_EN_Set << DAC_Channel;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->CR &= ~(CR_EN_Set << DAC_Channel);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_DMACmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified DAC channel DMA request.
+* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected
+* - NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel DMA request.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_DMACmd(u32 DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DAC channel DMA request */
+ DAC->CR |= CR_DMAEN_Set << DAC_Channel;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DAC channel DMA request */
+ DAC->CR &= ~(CR_DMAEN_Set << DAC_Channel);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the selected DAC channel software trigger.
+* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected
+* - NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel software trigger.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd(u32 DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->SWTRIGR |= SWTRIGR_SWTRIG_Set << (DAC_Channel >> 4);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->SWTRIGR &= ~(SWTRIGR_SWTRIG_Set << (DAC_Channel >> 4));
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables simultaneously the two DAC channels software
+* triggers.
+* Input - NewState: new state of the DAC channels software triggers.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable software trigger for both DAC channels */
+ DAC->SWTRIGR |= DUAL_SWTRIG_Set ;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable software trigger for both DAC channels */
+ DAC->SWTRIGR &= DUAL_SWTRIG_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_WaveGenerationCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the selected DAC channel wave generation.
+* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected
+* - DAC_Wave: Specifies the wave type to enable or disable.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Wave_Noise: noise wave generation
+* - DAC_Wave_Triangle: triangle wave generation
+* - NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel wave generation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_WaveGenerationCmd(u32 DAC_Channel, u32 DAC_Wave, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_WAVE(DAC_Wave));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->CR |= DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->CR &= ~(DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_SetChannel1Data
+* Description : Set the specified data holding register value for DAC channel1.
+* Input : - DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignement for DAC channel1.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignement selected
+* - DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignement selected
+* - DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignement selected
+* - Data : Data to be loaded in the selected data holding
+* register.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_SetChannel1Data(u32 DAC_Align, u16 Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data));
+
+ /* Set the DAC channel1 selected data holding register */
+ *((vu32 *)(DAC_BASE + DHR12R1_Offset + DAC_Align)) = (u32)Data;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_SetChannel2Data
+* Description : Set the specified data holding register value for DAC channel2.
+* Input : - DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignement for DAC channel2.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignement selected
+* - DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignement selected
+* - DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignement selected
+* - Data : Data to be loaded in the selected data holding
+* register.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_SetChannel2Data(u32 DAC_Align, u16 Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data));
+
+ /* Set the DAC channel2 selected data holding register */
+ *((vu32 *)(DAC_BASE + DHR12R2_Offset + DAC_Align)) = (u32)Data;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_SetDualChannelData
+* Description : Set the specified data holding register value for dual channel
+* DAC.
+* Input : - DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignement for dual channel DAC.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignement selected
+* - DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignement selected
+* - DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignement selected
+* - Data2: Data for DAC Channel2 to be loaded in the selected data
+* holding register.
+* - Data1: Data for DAC Channel1 to be loaded in the selected data
+* holding register.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DAC_SetDualChannelData(u32 DAC_Align, u16 Data2, u16 Data1)
+{
+ u32 data = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data1));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data2));
+
+ /* Calculate and set dual DAC data holding register value */
+ if (DAC_Align == DAC_Align_8b_R)
+ {
+ data = ((u32)Data2 << 8) | Data1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ data = ((u32)Data2 << 16) | Data1;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the dual DAC selected data holding register */
+ *((vu32 *)(DAC_BASE + DHR12RD_Offset + DAC_Align)) = data;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DAC_GetDataOutputValue
+* Description : Returns the last data output value of the selected DAC cahnnel.
+* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected
+* Output : None
+* Return : The selected DAC channel data output value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 DAC_GetDataOutputValue(u32 DAC_Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+
+ /* Returns the DAC channel data output register value */
+ return (u16) (*(vu32*)(DAC_BASE + DOR_Offset + ((u32)DAC_Channel >> 2)));
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04103b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the DBGMCU firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_dbgmcu.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define IDCODE_DEVID_Mask ((u32)0x00000FFF)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DBGMCU_GetREVID
+* Description : Returns the device revision identifier.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Device revision identifier
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 DBGMCU_GetREVID(void)
+{
+ return(DBGMCU->IDCODE >> 16);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DBGMCU_GetDEVID
+* Description : Returns the device identifier.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Device identifier
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 DBGMCU_GetDEVID(void)
+{
+ return(DBGMCU->IDCODE & IDCODE_DEVID_Mask);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DBGMCU_Config
+* Description : Configures the specified peripheral and low power mode behavior
+* when the MCU under Debug mode.
+* Input : - DBGMCU_Periph: specifies the peripheral and low power mode.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - DBGMCU_SLEEP: Keep debugger connection during SLEEP mode
+* - DBGMCU_STOP: Keep debugger connection during STOP mode
+* - DBGMCU_STANDBY: Keep debugger connection during STANDBY mode
+* - DBGMCU_IWDG_STOP: Debug IWDG stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_WWDG_STOP: Debug WWDG stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_TIM1_STOP: TIM1 counter stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_TIM2_STOP: TIM2 counter stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_TIM3_STOP: TIM3 counter stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_TIM4_STOP: TIM4 counter stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_CAN_STOP: Debug CAN stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: I2C1 SMBUS timeout mode stopped
+* when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: I2C2 SMBUS timeout mode stopped
+* when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_TIM5_STOP: TIM5 counter stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_TIM6_STOP: TIM6 counter stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_TIM7_STOP: TIM7 counter stopped when Core is halted
+* - DBGMCU_TIM8_STOP: TIM8 counter stopped when Core is halted
+* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral in Debug mode.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DBGMCU_Config(u32 DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DBGMCU_PERIPH(DBGMCU_Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ DBGMCU->CR |= DBGMCU_Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ DBGMCU->CR &= ~DBGMCU_Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dma.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dma.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eaefcb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dma.c @@ -0,0 +1,678 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_dma.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the DMA firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_dma.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* DMA ENABLE mask */
+#define CCR_ENABLE_Set ((u32)0x00000001)
+#define CCR_ENABLE_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFFE)
+
+/* DMA1 Channelx interrupt pending bit masks */
+#define DMA1_Channel1_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0000000F)
+#define DMA1_Channel2_IT_Mask ((u32)0x000000F0)
+#define DMA1_Channel3_IT_Mask ((u32)0x00000F00)
+#define DMA1_Channel4_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0000F000)
+#define DMA1_Channel5_IT_Mask ((u32)0x000F0000)
+#define DMA1_Channel6_IT_Mask ((u32)0x00F00000)
+#define DMA1_Channel7_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0F000000)
+
+/* DMA2 Channelx interrupt pending bit masks */
+#define DMA2_Channel1_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0000000F)
+#define DMA2_Channel2_IT_Mask ((u32)0x000000F0)
+#define DMA2_Channel3_IT_Mask ((u32)0x00000F00)
+#define DMA2_Channel4_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0000F000)
+#define DMA2_Channel5_IT_Mask ((u32)0x000F0000)
+
+/* DMA2 FLAG mask */
+#define FLAG_Mask ((u32)0x10000000)
+
+/* DMA registers Masks */
+#define CCR_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0xFFFF800F)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the DMAy Channelx registers to their default reset
+* values.
+* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and
+* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the
+* DMA Channel.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DMA_DeInit(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+
+ /* Disable the selected DMAy Channelx */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= CCR_ENABLE_Reset;
+
+ /* Reset DMAy Channelx control register */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR = 0;
+
+ /* Reset DMAy Channelx remaining bytes register */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR = 0;
+
+ /* Reset DMAy Channelx peripheral address register */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CPAR = 0;
+
+ /* Reset DMAy Channelx memory address register */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CMAR = 0;
+
+ switch (*(u32*)&DMAy_Channelx)
+ {
+ case DMA1_Channel1_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel1 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel1_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA1_Channel2_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel2 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel2_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA1_Channel3_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel3 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel3_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA1_Channel4_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel4 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel4_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA1_Channel5_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel5 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel5_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA1_Channel6_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel6 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel6_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA1_Channel7_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel7 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel7_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA2_Channel1_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel1 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel1_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA2_Channel2_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel2 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel2_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA2_Channel3_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel3 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel3_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA2_Channel4_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel4 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel4_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ case DMA2_Channel5_BASE:
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel5 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel5_IT_Mask;
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_Init
+* Description : Initializes the DMAy Channelx according to the specified
+* parameters in the DMA_InitStruct.
+* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and
+* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the
+* DMA Channel.
+* - DMA_InitStruct: pointer to a DMA_InitTypeDef structure that
+* contains the configuration information for the specified
+* DMA Channel.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+******************************************************************************/
+void DMA_Init(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, DMA_InitTypeDef* DMA_InitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_DIR(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_INC_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_INC_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_DATA_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_DATA_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MODE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PRIORITY(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_M2M_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M));
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CCR Configuration -----------------*/
+ /* Get the DMAy_Channelx CCR value */
+ tmpreg = DMAy_Channelx->CCR;
+ /* Clear MEM2MEM, PL, MSIZE, PSIZE, MINC, PINC, CIRC and DIR bits */
+ tmpreg &= CCR_CLEAR_Mask;
+ /* Configure DMAy Channelx: data transfer, data size, priority level and mode */
+ /* Set DIR bit according to DMA_DIR value */
+ /* Set CIRC bit according to DMA_Mode value */
+ /* Set PINC bit according to DMA_PeripheralInc value */
+ /* Set MINC bit according to DMA_MemoryInc value */
+ /* Set PSIZE bits according to DMA_PeripheralDataSize value */
+ /* Set MSIZE bits according to DMA_MemoryDataSize value */
+ /* Set PL bits according to DMA_Priority value */
+ /* Set the MEM2MEM bit according to DMA_M2M value */
+ tmpreg |= DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode |
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc |
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize |
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M;
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CCR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR = tmpreg;
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CNDTR Configuration ---------------*/
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CNDTR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize;
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CPAR Configuration ----------------*/
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CPAR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CPAR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr;
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CMAR Configuration ----------------*/
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CMAR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CMAR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryBaseAddr;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each DMA_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - DMA_InitStruct : pointer to a DMA_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DMA_StructInit(DMA_InitTypeDef* DMA_InitStruct)
+{
+/*-------------- Reset DMA init structure parameters values ------------------*/
+ /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr = 0;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryBaseAddr member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryBaseAddr = 0;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_DIR member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR = DMA_DIR_PeripheralSRC;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_BufferSize member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize = 0;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralInc member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc = DMA_PeripheralInc_Disable;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryInc member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc = DMA_MemoryInc_Disable;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralDataSize member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize = DMA_PeripheralDataSize_Byte;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryDataSize member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize = DMA_MemoryDataSize_Byte;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_Mode member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode = DMA_Mode_Normal;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_Priority member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority = DMA_Priority_Low;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA_M2M member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M = DMA_M2M_Disable;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_Cmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified DMAy Channelx.
+* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and
+* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the
+* DMA Channel.
+* - NewState: new state of the DMAy Channelx.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DMA_Cmd(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DMAy Channelx */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR |= CCR_ENABLE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DMAy Channelx */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= CCR_ENABLE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified DMAy Channelx interrupts.
+* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and
+* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the
+* DMA Channel.
+* - DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupts sources to be enabled
+* or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - DMA_IT_TC: Transfer complete interrupt mask
+* - DMA_IT_HT: Half transfer interrupt mask
+* - DMA_IT_TE: Transfer error interrupt mask
+* - NewState: new state of the specified DMA interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DMA_ITConfig(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, u32 DMA_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_CONFIG_IT(DMA_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DMA interrupts */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR |= DMA_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DMA interrupts */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= ~DMA_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_GetCurrDataCounter
+* Description : Returns the number of remaining data units in the current
+* DMAy Channelx transfer.
+* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and
+* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the
+* DMA Channel.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The number of remaining data units in the current DMAy Channelx
+* transfer.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 DMA_GetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+
+ /* Return the number of remaining data units for DMAy Channelx */
+ return ((u16)(DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified DMAy Channelx flag is set or not.
+* Input : - DMA_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error flag.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of DMA_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus DMA_GetFlagStatus(u32 DMA_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_GET_FLAG(DMA_FLAG));
+
+ /* Calculate the used DMA */
+ if ((DMA_FLAG & FLAG_Mask) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Get DMA2 ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = DMA2->ISR ;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get DMA1 ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = DMA1->ISR ;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified DMA flag */
+ if ((tmpreg & DMA_FLAG) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* DMA_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* DMA_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the DMA_FLAG status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the DMAy Channelx's pending flags.
+* Input : - DMA_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination (for the same DMA) of
+* the following values:
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA1_FLAG_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer flag.
+* - DMA2_FLAG_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error flag.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DMA_ClearFlag(u32 DMA_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(DMA_FLAG));
+
+ /* Calculate the used DMA */
+ if ((DMA_FLAG & FLAG_Mask) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Clear the selected DMA flags */
+ DMA2->IFCR = DMA_FLAG;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Clear the selected DMA flags */
+ DMA1->IFCR = DMA_FLAG;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified DMAy Channelx interrupt has
+* occurred or not.
+* Input : - DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - DMA1_IT_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error interrupt.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of DMA_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus DMA_GetITStatus(u32 DMA_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_GET_IT(DMA_IT));
+
+ /* Calculate the used DMA */
+ if ((DMA_IT & FLAG_Mask) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Get DMA2 ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = DMA2->ISR ;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get DMA1 ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = DMA1->ISR ;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified DMA interrupt */
+ if ((tmpreg & DMA_IT) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* DMA_IT is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* DMA_IT is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the DMA_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : DMA_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the DMAy Channelx’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : - DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination (for the same DMA) of
+* the following values:
+* - DMA1_IT_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA1_IT_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
+* - DMA2_IT_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error interrupt.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(u32 DMA_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_CLEAR_IT(DMA_IT));
+
+ /* Calculate the used DMA */
+ if ((DMA_IT & FLAG_Mask) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Clear the selected DMA interrupt pending bits */
+ DMA2->IFCR = DMA_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Clear the selected DMA interrupt pending bits */
+ DMA1->IFCR = DMA_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
+
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_exti.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_exti.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..021a051 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_exti.c @@ -0,0 +1,219 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_exti.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the EXTI firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_exti.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define EXTI_LineNone ((u32)0x00000) /* No interrupt selected */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : EXTI_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the EXTI peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void EXTI_DeInit(void)
+{
+ EXTI->IMR = 0x00000000;
+ EXTI->EMR = 0x00000000;
+ EXTI->RTSR = 0x00000000;
+ EXTI->FTSR = 0x00000000;
+ EXTI->PR = 0x0007FFFF;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : EXTI_Init
+* Description : Initializes the EXTI peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the EXTI_InitStruct.
+* Input : - EXTI_InitStruct: pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the EXTI
+* peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void EXTI_Init(EXTI_InitTypeDef* EXTI_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_MODE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_TRIGGER(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger));
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd));
+
+ if (EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Clear EXTI line configuration */
+ EXTI->IMR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ EXTI->EMR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+
+ *(vu32 *)(EXTI_BASE + (u32)EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode)|= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+
+ /* Clear Rising Falling edge configuration */
+ EXTI->RTSR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ EXTI->FTSR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+
+ /* Select the trigger for the selected external interrupts */
+ if (EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger == EXTI_Trigger_Rising_Falling)
+ {
+ /* Rising Falling edge */
+ EXTI->RTSR |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ EXTI->FTSR |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *(vu32 *)(EXTI_BASE + (u32)EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger)|= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected external lines */
+ *(vu32 *)(EXTI_BASE + (u32)EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode)&= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : EXTI_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each EXTI_InitStruct member with its reset value.
+* Input : - EXTI_InitStruct: pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void EXTI_StructInit(EXTI_InitTypeDef* EXTI_InitStruct)
+{
+ EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line = EXTI_LineNone;
+ EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode = EXTI_Mode_Interrupt;
+ EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger = EXTI_Trigger_Falling;
+ EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd = DISABLE;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt
+* Description : Generates a Software interrupt.
+* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines to be enabled or
+* disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where
+* x can be (0..18).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt(u32 EXTI_Line)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ EXTI->SWIER |= EXTI_Line;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : EXTI_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified EXTI line flag is set or not.
+* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line flag to check.
+* This parameter can be:
+* - EXTI_Linex: External interrupt line x where x(0..18)
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus EXTI_GetFlagStatus(u32 EXTI_Line)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GET_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ if ((EXTI->PR & EXTI_Line) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : EXTI_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the EXTI’s line pending flags.
+* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines flags to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where
+* x can be (0..18).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void EXTI_ClearFlag(u32 EXTI_Line)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ EXTI->PR = EXTI_Line;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : EXTI_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified EXTI line is asserted or not.
+* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line to check.
+* This parameter can be:
+* - EXTI_Linex: External interrupt line x where x(0..18)
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus EXTI_GetITStatus(u32 EXTI_Line)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 enablestatus = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GET_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ enablestatus = EXTI->IMR & EXTI_Line;
+
+ if (((EXTI->PR & EXTI_Line) != (u32)RESET) && (enablestatus != (u32)RESET))
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : EXTI_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the EXTI’s line pending bits.
+* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where
+* x can be (0..18).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void EXTI_ClearITPendingBit(u32 EXTI_Line)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ EXTI->PR = EXTI_Line;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_flash.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_flash.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66952f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_flash.c @@ -0,0 +1,916 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_flash.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the FLASH firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_flash.h"
+void test(u32 x) {
+ int y;
+ x = 1;
+ y = x;
+}
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Flash Access Control Register bits */
+#define ACR_LATENCY_Mask ((u32)0x00000038)
+#define ACR_HLFCYA_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFFF7)
+#define ACR_PRFTBE_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFFEF)
+
+#ifdef _FLASH_PROG
+/* Flash Access Control Register bits */
+#define ACR_PRFTBS_Mask ((u32)0x00000020)
+
+/* Flash Control Register bits */
+#define CR_PG_Set ((u32)0x00000001)
+#define CR_PG_Reset ((u32)0x00001FFE)
+
+#define CR_PER_Set ((u32)0x00000002)
+#define CR_PER_Reset ((u32)0x00001FFD)
+
+#define CR_MER_Set ((u32)0x00000004)
+#define CR_MER_Reset ((u32)0x00001FFB)
+
+#define CR_OPTPG_Set ((u32)0x00000010)
+#define CR_OPTPG_Reset ((u32)0x00001FEF)
+
+#define CR_OPTER_Set ((u32)0x00000020)
+#define CR_OPTER_Reset ((u32)0x00001FDF)
+
+#define CR_STRT_Set ((u32)0x00000040)
+
+#define CR_LOCK_Set ((u32)0x00000080)
+
+/* FLASH Mask */
+#define RDPRT_Mask ((u32)0x00000002)
+#define WRP0_Mask ((u32)0x000000FF)
+#define WRP1_Mask ((u32)0x0000FF00)
+#define WRP2_Mask ((u32)0x00FF0000)
+#define WRP3_Mask ((u32)0xFF000000)
+
+/* FLASH Keys */
+#define RDP_Key ((u16)0x00A5)
+#define FLASH_KEY1 ((u32)0x45670123)
+#define FLASH_KEY2 ((u32)0xCDEF89AB)
+
+/* Delay definition */
+#define EraseTimeout ((u32)0x00000FFF)
+#define ProgramTimeout ((u32)0x0000000F)
+#endif
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+#ifdef _FLASH_PROG
+static void delay(void);
+#endif
+
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_SetLatency
+* Description : Sets the code latency value.
+* Input : - FLASH_Latency: specifies the FLASH Latency value.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FLASH_Latency_0: FLASH Zero Latency cycle
+* - FLASH_Latency_1: FLASH One Latency cycle
+* - FLASH_Latency_2: FLASH Two Latency cycles
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FLASH_SetLatency(u32 FLASH_Latency)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_LATENCY(FLASH_Latency));
+
+ /* Sets the Latency value */
+ FLASH->ACR &= ACR_LATENCY_Mask;
+ FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_Latency;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_HalfCycleAccessCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Half cycle flash access.
+* Input : - FLASH_HalfCycle: specifies the FLASH Half cycle Access mode.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FLASH_HalfCycleAccess_Enable: FLASH Half Cycle Enable
+* - FLASH_HalfCycleAccess_Disable: FLASH Half Cycle Disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FLASH_HalfCycleAccessCmd(u32 FLASH_HalfCycleAccess)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_HALFCYCLEACCESS_STATE(FLASH_HalfCycleAccess));
+
+ /* Enable or disable the Half cycle access */
+ FLASH->ACR &= ACR_HLFCYA_Mask;
+ FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_HalfCycleAccess;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Prefetch Buffer.
+* Input : - FLASH_PrefetchBuffer: specifies the Prefetch buffer status.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FLASH_PrefetchBuffer_Enable: FLASH Prefetch Buffer Enable
+* - FLASH_PrefetchBuffer_Disable: FLASH Prefetch Buffer Disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(u32 FLASH_PrefetchBuffer)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PREFETCHBUFFER_STATE(FLASH_PrefetchBuffer));
+
+ /* Enable or disable the Prefetch Buffer */
+ FLASH->ACR &= ACR_PRFTBE_Mask;
+ FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_PrefetchBuffer;
+}
+
+#ifdef _FLASH_PROG
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_Unlock
+* Description : Unlocks the FLASH Program Erase Controller.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FLASH_Unlock(void)
+{
+ /* Authorize the FPEC Access */
+ FLASH->KEYR = FLASH_KEY1;
+ FLASH->KEYR = FLASH_KEY2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_Lock
+* Description : Locks the FLASH Program Erase Controller.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FLASH_Lock(void)
+{
+ /* Set the Lock Bit to lock the FPEC and the FCR */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_LOCK_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_ErasePage
+* Description : Erases a specified FLASH page.
+* Input : - Page_Address: The page address to be erased.
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_ErasePage(u32 Page_Address)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_ADDRESS(Page_Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the page */
+ FLASH->CR|= CR_PER_Set;
+ FLASH->AR = Page_Address;
+ FLASH->CR|= CR_STRT_Set;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* if the erase operation is completed, disable the PER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_PER_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Erase Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_EraseAllPages
+* Description : Erases all FLASH pages.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllPages(void)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase all pages */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_MER_Set;
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_STRT_Set;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* if the erase operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_MER_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Erase Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_EraseOptionBytes
+* Description : Erases the FLASH option bytes.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseOptionBytes(void)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Authorize the small information block programming */
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1;
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2;
+
+ /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the option bytes */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTER_Set;
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_STRT_Set;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* if the erase operation is completed, disable the OPTER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTER_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set;
+
+ /* Enable the readout access */
+ OB->RDP= RDP_Key;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* Disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the erase status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_ProgramWord
+* Description : Programs a word at a specified address.
+* Input : - Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
+* - Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord(u32 Address, u32 Data)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new first
+ half word */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_PG_Set;
+
+ *(vu16*)Address = (u16)Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new second
+ half word */
+ *(vu16*)(Address + 2) = Data >> 16;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* Disable the PG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_PG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* Disable the PG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_PG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_ProgramHalfWord
+* Description : Programs a half word at a specified address.
+* Input : - Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
+* - Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(u32 Address, u16 Data)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new data */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_PG_Set;
+
+ *(vu16*)Address = Data;
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the PG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_PG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_ProgramOptionByteData
+* Description : Programs a half word at a specified Option Byte Data address.
+* Input : - Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
+* This parameter can be 0x1FFFF804 or 0x1FFFF806.
+* - Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramOptionByteData(u32 Address, u8 Data)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Authorize the small information block programming */
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1;
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2;
+
+ /* Enables the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set;
+ *(vu16*)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte Data Program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_EnableWriteProtection
+* Description : Write protects the desired pages
+* Input : - FLASH_Pages: specifies the address of the pages to be
+* write protected. This parameter can be:
+* - For STM32F10Xxx Medium-density devices (FLASH page size equal to 1 KB)
+* - A value between FLASH_WRProt_Pages0to3 and
+* FLASH_WRProt_Pages124to127
+* - For STM32F10Xxx High-density devices (FLASH page size equal to 2 KB)
+* - A value between FLASH_WRProt_Pages0to1 and
+* FLASH_WRProt_Pages60to61 or FLASH_WRProt_Pages62to255
+* - FLASH_WRProt_AllPages
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_EnableWriteProtection(u32 FLASH_Pages)
+{
+ u16 WRP0_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP1_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP2_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP3_Data = 0xFFFF;
+
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_WRPROT_PAGE(FLASH_Pages));
+
+ FLASH_Pages = (u32)(~FLASH_Pages);
+ WRP0_Data = (vu16)(FLASH_Pages & WRP0_Mask);
+ WRP1_Data = (vu16)((FLASH_Pages & WRP1_Mask) >> 8);
+ WRP2_Data = (vu16)((FLASH_Pages & WRP2_Mask) >> 16);
+ WRP3_Data = (vu16)((FLASH_Pages & WRP3_Mask) >> 24);
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Authorizes the small information block programming */
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1;
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2;
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set;
+
+ if(WRP0_Data != 0xFF)
+ {
+ OB->WRP0 = WRP0_Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+ }
+ if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE) && (WRP1_Data != 0xFF))
+ {
+ OB->WRP1 = WRP1_Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+ }
+
+ if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE) && (WRP2_Data != 0xFF))
+ {
+ OB->WRP2 = WRP2_Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+ }
+
+ if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE)&& (WRP3_Data != 0xFF))
+ {
+ OB->WRP3 = WRP3_Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+ }
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the write protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_ReadOutProtection
+* Description : Enables or disables the read out protection.
+* If the user has already programmed the other option bytes before
+* calling this function, he must re-program them since this
+* function erases all option bytes.
+* Input : - Newstate: new state of the ReadOut Protection.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_ReadOutProtection(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Authorizes the small information block programming */
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1;
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2;
+
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTER_Set;
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_STRT_Set;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* if the erase operation is completed, disable the OPTER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTER_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set;
+
+ if(NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ OB->RDP = 0x00;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ OB->RDP = RDP_Key;
+ }
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* Disable the OPTER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTER_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_UserOptionByteConfig
+* Description : Programs the FLASH User Option Byte: IWDG_SW / RST_STOP /
+* RST_STDBY.
+* Input : - OB_IWDG: Selects the IWDG mode
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - OB_IWDG_SW: Software IWDG selected
+* - OB_IWDG_HW: Hardware IWDG selected
+* - OB_STOP: Reset event when entering STOP mode.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - OB_STOP_NoRST: No reset generated when entering in STOP
+* - OB_STOP_RST: Reset generated when entering in STOP
+* - OB_STDBY: Reset event when entering Standby mode.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - OB_STDBY_NoRST: No reset generated when entering in STANDBY
+* - OB_STDBY_RST: Reset generated when entering in STANDBY
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_UserOptionByteConfig(u16 OB_IWDG, u16 OB_STOP, u16 OB_STDBY)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_IWDG_SOURCE(OB_IWDG));
+ assert_param(IS_OB_STOP_SOURCE(OB_STOP));
+ assert_param(IS_OB_STDBY_SOURCE(OB_STDBY));
+
+ /* Authorize the small information block programming */
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1;
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set;
+
+ OB->USER = ( OB_IWDG | OB_STOP |OB_STDBY) | (u16)0xF8;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_BUSY)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_GetUserOptionByte
+* Description : Returns the FLASH User Option Bytes values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : The FLASH User Option Bytes values:IWDG_SW(Bit0), RST_STOP(Bit1)
+* and RST_STDBY(Bit2).
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 FLASH_GetUserOptionByte(void)
+{
+ /* Return the User Option Byte */
+ return (u32)(FLASH->OBR >> 2);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_GetWriteProtectionOptionByte
+* Description : Returns the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes Register value.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes Register value
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 FLASH_GetWriteProtectionOptionByte(void)
+{
+ /* Return the Falsh write protection Register value */
+ return (u32)(FLASH->WRPR);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_GetReadOutProtectionStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the FLASH Read Out Protection Status is set
+* or not.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH ReadOut Protection Status(SET or RESET)
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus FLASH_GetReadOutProtectionStatus(void)
+{
+ FlagStatus readoutstatus = RESET;
+
+ if ((FLASH->OBR & RDPRT_Mask) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ readoutstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ readoutstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return readoutstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the FLASH Prefetch Buffer status is set or not.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Prefetch Buffer Status (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus(void)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ if ((FLASH->ACR & ACR_PRFTBS_Mask) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the new state of FLASH Prefetch Buffer Status (SET or RESET) */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified FLASH interrupts.
+* Input : - FLASH_IT: specifies the FLASH interrupt sources to be
+* enabled or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - FLASH_IT_ERROR: FLASH Error Interrupt
+* - FLASH_IT_EOP: FLASH end of operation Interrupt
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FLASH_ITConfig(u16 FLASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_IT(FLASH_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if(NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the interrupt sources */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the interrupt sources */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~(u32)FLASH_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified FLASH flag is set or not.
+* Input : - FLASH_FLAG: specifies the FLASH flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FLASH_FLAG_BSY: FLASH Busy flag
+* - FLASH_FLAG_PGERR: FLASH Program error flag
+* - FLASH_FLAG_WRPRTERR: FLASH Write protected error flag
+* - FLASH_FLAG_EOP: FLASH End of Operation flag
+* - FLASH_FLAG_OPTERR: FLASH Option Byte error flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus FLASH_GetFlagStatus(u16 FLASH_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG)) ;
+
+ if(FLASH_FLAG == FLASH_FLAG_OPTERR)
+ {
+ if((FLASH->OBR & FLASH_FLAG_OPTERR) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if((FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET) */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the FLASH’s pending flags.
+* Input : - FLASH_FLAG: specifies the FLASH flags to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - FLASH_FLAG_BSY: FLASH Busy flag
+* - FLASH_FLAG_PGERR: FLASH Program error flag
+* - FLASH_FLAG_WRPRTERR: FLASH Write protected error flag
+* - FLASH_FLAG_EOP: FLASH End of Operation flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FLASH_ClearFlag(u16 FLASH_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG)) ;
+
+ /* Clear the flags */
+ FLASH->SR = FLASH_FLAG;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_GetStatus
+* Description : Returns the FLASH Status.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP or FLASH_COMPLETE
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_GetStatus(void)
+{
+ FLASH_Status flashstatus = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ if((FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG_BSY) == FLASH_FLAG_BSY)
+ {
+ flashstatus = FLASH_BUSY;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if(FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG_PGERR)
+ {
+ flashstatus = FLASH_ERROR_PG;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if(FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG_WRPRTERR)
+ {
+ flashstatus = FLASH_ERROR_WRP;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ flashstatus = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Flash Status */
+ return flashstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FLASH_WaitForLastOperation
+* Description : Waits for a Flash operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur.
+* Input : - Timeout: FLASH progamming Timeout
+* Output : None
+* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or
+* FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+*******************************************************************************/
+FLASH_Status FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(u32 Timeout)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check for the Flash Status */
+ status = FLASH_GetStatus();
+
+ /* Wait for a Flash operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur */
+ while((status == FLASH_BUSY) && (Timeout != 0x00))
+ {
+ delay();
+ status = FLASH_GetStatus();
+ Timeout--;
+ }
+
+ if(Timeout == 0x00 )
+ {
+ status = FLASH_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the operation status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : delay
+* Description : Inserts a time delay.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+static void delay(void)
+{
+ vu32 i = 0;
+
+ for(i = 0xFF; i != 0; i--)
+ {
+ }
+}
+#endif
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_fsmc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_fsmc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4068a7f --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_fsmc.c @@ -0,0 +1,861 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_fsmc.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the FSMC firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_fsmc.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* --------------------- FSMC registers bit mask ---------------------------- */
+/* FSMC BCRx Mask */
+#define BCR_MBKEN_Set ((u32)0x00000001)
+#define BCR_MBKEN_Reset ((u32)0x000FFFFE)
+#define BCR_FACCEN_Set ((u32)0x00000040)
+
+/* FSMC PCRx Mask */
+#define PCR_PBKEN_Set ((u32)0x00000004)
+#define PCR_PBKEN_Reset ((u32)0x000FFFFB)
+#define PCR_ECCEN_Set ((u32)0x00000040)
+#define PCR_ECCEN_Reset ((u32)0x000FFFBF)
+#define PCR_MemoryType_NAND ((u32)0x00000008)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NORSRAMDeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the FSMC NOR/SRAM Banks registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM1
+* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM2
+* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM3
+* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM4
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NORSRAMDeInit(u32 FSMC_Bank)
+{
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+
+ /* FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1 */
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x000030DB;
+ }
+ /* FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2, FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3 or FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4 */
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x000030D2;
+ }
+
+ FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank + 1] = 0x0FFFFFFF;
+ FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x0FFFFFFF;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NANDDeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the FSMC NAND Banks registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NANDDeInit(u32 FSMC_Bank)
+{
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_NAND_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ /* Set the FSMC_Bank2 registers to their reset values */
+ FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 = 0x00000018;
+ FSMC_Bank2->SR2 = 0x00000040;
+ FSMC_Bank2->PMEM2 = 0xFCFCFCFC;
+ FSMC_Bank2->PATT2 = 0xFCFCFCFC;
+ }
+ /* FSMC_Bank3_NAND */
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set the FSMC_Bank3 registers to their reset values */
+ FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 = 0x00000018;
+ FSMC_Bank3->SR3 = 0x00000040;
+ FSMC_Bank3->PMEM3 = 0xFCFCFCFC;
+ FSMC_Bank3->PATT3 = 0xFCFCFCFC;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_PCCARDDeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the FSMC PCCARD Bank registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_PCCARDDeInit(void)
+{
+ /* Set the FSMC_Bank4 registers to their reset values */
+ FSMC_Bank4->PCR4 = 0x00000018;
+ FSMC_Bank4->SR4 = 0x00000000;
+ FSMC_Bank4->PMEM4 = 0xFCFCFCFC;
+ FSMC_Bank4->PATT4 = 0xFCFCFCFC;
+ FSMC_Bank4->PIO4 = 0xFCFCFCFC;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NORSRAMInit
+* Description : Initializes the FSMC NOR/SRAM Banks according to the
+* specified parameters in the FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct.
+* Input : - FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct : pointer to a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the configuration information for
+* the FSMC NOR/SRAM specified Banks.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NORSRAMInit(FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef* FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_MUX(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_MEMORY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_MEMORY_WIDTH(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_BURSTMODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_POLARITY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRAP_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_SIGNAL_ACTIVE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRITE_OPERATION(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAITE_SIGNAL(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_EXTENDED_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_ASYNC_WAIT(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsyncWait));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRITE_BURST(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATASETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_TURNAROUND_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_CLK_DIV(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATA_LATENCY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_ACCESS_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode));
+
+ /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM control register configuration */
+ FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] =
+ (u32)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsyncWait |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst;
+
+ if(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType == FSMC_MemoryType_NOR)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] |= (u32)BCR_FACCEN_Set;
+ }
+
+ /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM timing register configuration */
+ FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank+1] =
+ (u32)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime << 4) |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime << 8) |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration << 16) |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision << 20) |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency << 24) |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode;
+
+
+
+ /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM timing register for write configuration, if extended mode is used */
+ if(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode == FSMC_ExtendedMode_Enable)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATASETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_TURNAROUND_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_CLK_DIV(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATA_LATENCY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_ACCESS_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode));
+
+ FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] =
+ (u32)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime << 4 )|
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime << 8) |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration << 16) |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision << 20) |
+ (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency << 24) |
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] = 0x0FFFFFFF;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NANDInit
+* Description : Initializes the FSMC NAND Banks according to the specified
+* parameters in the FSMC_NANDInitStruct.
+* Input : - FSMC_NANDInitStruct : pointer to a FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the configuration information for
+* the FSMC NAND specified Banks.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NANDInit(FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef* FSMC_NANDInitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmppcr = 0x00000000, tmppmem = 0x00000000, tmppatt = 0x00000000;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param( IS_FSMC_NAND_BANK(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param( IS_FSMC_WAIT_FEATURE(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature));
+ assert_param( IS_FSMC_DATA_WIDTH(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth));
+ assert_param( IS_FSMC_ECC_STATE(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECC));
+ assert_param( IS_FSMC_ECCPAGE_SIZE(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECCPageSize));
+ assert_param( IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_LOW_MAPPING(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping));
+ assert_param( IS_FSMC_TCLR_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime));
+ assert_param( IS_FSMC_TAR_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime));
+
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime));
+
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime));
+
+ /* Set the tmppcr value according to FSMC_NANDInitStruct parameters */
+ tmppcr = (u32)FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature |
+ PCR_MemoryType_NAND |
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth |
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECC |
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECCPageSize |
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping |
+ (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime << 9 )|
+ (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime << 13);
+
+ /* Set tmppmem value according to FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStructure parameters */
+ tmppmem = (u32)FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime |
+ (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) |
+ (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)|
+ (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24);
+
+ /* Set tmppatt value according to FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStructure parameters */
+ tmppatt = (u32)FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime |
+ (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) |
+ (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)|
+ (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24);
+
+ if(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ /* FSMC_Bank2_NAND registers configuration */
+ FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 = tmppcr;
+ FSMC_Bank2->PMEM2 = tmppmem;
+ FSMC_Bank2->PATT2 = tmppatt;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* FSMC_Bank3_NAND registers configuration */
+ FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 = tmppcr;
+ FSMC_Bank3->PMEM3 = tmppmem;
+ FSMC_Bank3->PATT3 = tmppatt;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_PCCARDInit
+* Description : Initializes the FSMC PCCARD Bank according to the specified
+* parameters in the FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct.
+* Input : - FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct : pointer to a FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the configuration information for
+* the FSMC PCCARD Bank.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_PCCARDInit(FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef* FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_FEATURE(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_LOW_MAPPING(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_TCLR_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_TAR_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime));
+
+
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime));
+
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime));
+
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime));
+
+ /* Set the PCR4 register value according to FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct parameters */
+ FSMC_Bank4->PCR4 = (u32)FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature |
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping |
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime << 9) |
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime << 13);
+
+ /* Set PMEM4 register value according to FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStructure parameters */
+ FSMC_Bank4->PMEM4 = (u32)FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime |
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) |
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)|
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24);
+
+ /* Set PATT4 register value according to FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStructure parameters */
+ FSMC_Bank4->PATT4 = (u32)FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime |
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) |
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)|
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24);
+
+ /* Set PIO4 register value according to FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStructure parameters */
+ FSMC_Bank4->PIO4 = (u32)FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime |
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) |
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)|
+ (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NORSRAMStructInit
+* Description : Fills each FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct: pointer to a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef
+* structure which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NORSRAMStructInit(FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef* FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Reset NOR/SRAM Init structure parameters values */
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank = FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux = FSMC_DataAddressMux_Enable;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType = FSMC_MemoryType_SRAM;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth = FSMC_MemoryDataWidth_8b;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode = FSMC_BurstAccessMode_Disable;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity = FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity_Low;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode = FSMC_WrapMode_Disable;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive = FSMC_WaitSignalActive_BeforeWaitState;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation = FSMC_WriteOperation_Enable;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal = FSMC_WaitSignal_Enable;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode = FSMC_ExtendedMode_Disable;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsyncWait = FSMC_AsyncWait_Disable;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst = FSMC_WriteBurst_Disable;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime = 0xFF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode = FSMC_AccessMode_A;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime = 0xFF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency = 0xF;
+ FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode = FSMC_AccessMode_A;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NANDStructInit
+* Description : Fills each FSMC_NANDInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct: pointer to a FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef
+* structure which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NANDStructInit(FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef* FSMC_NANDInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Reset NAND Init structure parameters values */
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Bank = FSMC_Bank2_NAND;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature = FSMC_Waitfeature_Disable;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth = FSMC_MemoryDataWidth_8b;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECC = FSMC_ECC_Disable;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECCPageSize = FSMC_ECCPageSize_256Bytes;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping = FSMC_AddressLowMapping_Direct;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime = 0x0;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime = 0x0;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_PCCARDStructInit
+* Description : Fills each FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct: pointer to a FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef
+* structure which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_PCCARDStructInit(FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef* FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Reset PCCARD Init structure parameters values */
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature = FSMC_Waitfeature_Disable;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping = FSMC_AddressLowMapping_Direct;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime = 0x0;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime = 0x0;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC;
+ FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NORSRAMCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified NOR/SRAM Memory Bank.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM1
+* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM2
+* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM3
+* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM4
+* : - NewState: new state of the FSMC_Bank.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NORSRAMCmd(u32 FSMC_Bank, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected NOR/SRAM Bank by setting the PBKEN bit in the BCRx register */
+ FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] |= BCR_MBKEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected NOR/SRAM Bank by clearing the PBKEN bit in the BCRx register */
+ FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] &= BCR_MBKEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NANDCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified NAND Memory Bank.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* : - NewState: new state of the FSMC_Bank.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NANDCmd(u32 FSMC_Bank, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_NAND_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected NAND Bank by setting the PBKEN bit in the PCRx register */
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 |= PCR_PBKEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 |= PCR_PBKEN_Set;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected NAND Bank by clearing the PBKEN bit in the PCRx register */
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 &= PCR_PBKEN_Reset;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 &= PCR_PBKEN_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_PCCARDCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the PCCARD Memory Bank.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the PCCARD Memory Bank.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_PCCARDCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the PCCARD Bank by setting the PBKEN bit in the PCR4 register */
+ FSMC_Bank4->PCR4 |= PCR_PBKEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the PCCARD Bank by clearing the PBKEN bit in the PCR4 register */
+ FSMC_Bank4->PCR4 &= PCR_PBKEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_NANDECCCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the FSMC NAND ECC feature.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* : - NewState: new state of the FSMC NAND ECC feature.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_NANDECCCmd(u32 FSMC_Bank, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_NAND_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected NAND Bank ECC function by setting the ECCEN bit in the PCRx register */
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 |= PCR_ECCEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 |= PCR_ECCEN_Set;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected NAND Bank ECC function by clearing the ECCEN bit in the PCRx register */
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 &= PCR_ECCEN_Reset;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 &= PCR_ECCEN_Reset;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_GetECC
+* Description : Returns the error correction code register value.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* Output : None
+* Return : The Error Correction Code (ECC) value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 FSMC_GetECC(u32 FSMC_Bank)
+{
+ u32 eccval = 0x00000000;
+
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ /* Get the ECCR2 register value */
+ eccval = FSMC_Bank2->ECCR2;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get the ECCR3 register value */
+ eccval = FSMC_Bank3->ECCR3;
+ }
+ /* Return the error correction code value */
+ return(eccval);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified FSMC interrupts.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD
+* - FSMC_IT: specifies the FSMC interrupt sources to be
+* enabled or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - FSMC_IT_RisingEdge: Rising edge detection interrupt.
+* - FSMC_IT_Level: Level edge detection interrupt.
+* - FSMC_IT_FallingEdge: Falling edge detection interrupt.
+* - NewState: new state of the specified FSMC interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_ITConfig(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT(FSMC_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected FSMC_Bank2 interrupts */
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank2->SR2 |= FSMC_IT;
+ }
+ /* Enable the selected FSMC_Bank3 interrupts */
+ else if (FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank3->SR3 |= FSMC_IT;
+ }
+ /* Enable the selected FSMC_Bank4 interrupts */
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank4->SR4 |= FSMC_IT;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected FSMC_Bank2 interrupts */
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+
+ FSMC_Bank2->SR2 &= (u32)~FSMC_IT;
+ }
+ /* Disable the selected FSMC_Bank3 interrupts */
+ else if (FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank3->SR3 &= (u32)~FSMC_IT;
+ }
+ /* Disable the selected FSMC_Bank4 interrupts */
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank4->SR4 &= (u32)~FSMC_IT;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified FSMC flag is set or not.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD
+* - FSMC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_FLAG_RisingEdge: Rising egde detection Flag.
+* - FSMC_FLAG_Level: Level detection Flag.
+* - FSMC_FLAG_FallingEdge: Falling egde detection Flag.
+* - FSMC_FLAG_FEMPT: Fifo empty Flag.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of FSMC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus FSMC_GetFlagStatus(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 tmpsr = 0x00000000;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_GETFLAG_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_GET_FLAG(FSMC_FLAG));
+
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ tmpsr = FSMC_Bank2->SR2;
+ }
+ else if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND)
+ {
+ tmpsr = FSMC_Bank3->SR3;
+ }
+ /* FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD*/
+ else
+ {
+ tmpsr = FSMC_Bank4->SR4;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the flag status */
+ if ((tmpsr & FSMC_FLAG) != (u16)RESET )
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the flag status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the FSMC’s pending flags.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD
+* - FSMC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - FSMC_FLAG_RisingEdge: Rising egde detection Flag.
+* - FSMC_FLAG_Level: Level detection Flag.
+* - FSMC_FLAG_FallingEdge: Falling egde detection Flag.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_ClearFlag(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_GETFLAG_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_CLEAR_FLAG(FSMC_FLAG)) ;
+
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank2->SR2 &= ~FSMC_FLAG;
+ }
+ else if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank3->SR3 &= ~FSMC_FLAG;
+ }
+ /* FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD*/
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank4->SR4 &= ~FSMC_FLAG;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified FSMC interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD
+* - FSMC_IT: specifies the FSMC interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_IT_RisingEdge: Rising edge detection interrupt.
+* - FSMC_IT_Level: Level edge detection interrupt.
+* - FSMC_IT_FallingEdge: Falling edge detection interrupt.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of FSMC_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus FSMC_GetITStatus(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 tmpsr = 0x0, itstatus = 0x0, itenable = 0x0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_GET_IT(FSMC_IT));
+
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ tmpsr = FSMC_Bank2->SR2;
+ }
+ else if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND)
+ {
+ tmpsr = FSMC_Bank3->SR3;
+ }
+ /* FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD*/
+ else
+ {
+ tmpsr = FSMC_Bank4->SR4;
+ }
+
+ itstatus = tmpsr & FSMC_IT;
+
+ itenable = tmpsr & (FSMC_IT >> 3);
+
+ if ((itstatus != (u32)RESET) && (itenable != (u32)RESET))
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : FSMC_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the FSMC’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND
+* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD
+* - FSMC_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - FSMC_IT_RisingEdge: Rising edge detection interrupt.
+* - FSMC_IT_Level: Level edge detection interrupt.
+* - FSMC_IT_FallingEdge: Falling edge detection interrupt.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void FSMC_ClearITPendingBit(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT_BANK(FSMC_Bank));
+ assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT(FSMC_IT));
+
+ if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank2->SR2 &= ~(FSMC_IT >> 3);
+ }
+ else if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND)
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank3->SR3 &= ~(FSMC_IT >> 3);
+ }
+ /* FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD*/
+ else
+ {
+ FSMC_Bank4->SR4 &= ~(FSMC_IT >> 3);
+ }
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_gpio.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_gpio.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1979c05 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_gpio.c @@ -0,0 +1,583 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_gpio.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the GPIO firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_gpio.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ------------ RCC registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */
+#define AFIO_OFFSET (AFIO_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
+
+/* --- EVENTCR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of EVOE bit */
+#define EVCR_OFFSET (AFIO_OFFSET + 0x00)
+#define EVOE_BitNumber ((u8)0x07)
+#define EVCR_EVOE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (EVCR_OFFSET * 32) + (EVOE_BitNumber * 4))
+
+#define EVCR_PORTPINCONFIG_MASK ((u16)0xFF80)
+#define LSB_MASK ((u16)0xFFFF)
+#define DBGAFR_POSITION_MASK ((u32)0x000F0000)
+#define DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK ((u32)0xF0FFFFFF)
+#define DBGAFR_LOCATION_MASK ((u32)0x00200000)
+#define DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK ((u32)0x00100000)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+
+ switch (*(u32*)&GPIOx)
+ {
+ case GPIOA_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOA, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOA, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case GPIOB_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOB, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOB, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case GPIOC_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOC, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOC, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case GPIOD_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOD, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOD, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case GPIOE_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOE, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOE, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case GPIOF_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOF, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOF, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case GPIOG_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOG, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOG, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_AFIODeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the Alternate Functions (remap, event control
+* and EXTI configuration) registers to their default reset
+* values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_AFIODeInit(void)
+{
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_AFIO, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_AFIO, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_Init
+* Description : Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the GPIO_InitStruct.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* - GPIO_InitStruct: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure that
+* contains the configuration information for the specified GPIO
+* peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_Init(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct)
+{
+ u32 currentmode = 0x00, currentpin = 0x00, pinpos = 0x00, pos = 0x00;
+ u32 tmpreg = 0x00, pinmask = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_MODE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin));
+
+/*---------------------------- GPIO Mode Configuration -----------------------*/
+ currentmode = ((u32)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode) & ((u32)0x0F);
+
+ if ((((u32)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode) & ((u32)0x10)) != 0x00)
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed));
+ /* Output mode */
+ currentmode |= (u32)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed;
+ }
+
+/*---------------------------- GPIO CRL Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Configure the eight low port pins */
+ if (((u32)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin & ((u32)0x00FF)) != 0x00)
+ {
+ tmpreg = GPIOx->CRL;
+
+ for (pinpos = 0x00; pinpos < 0x08; pinpos++)
+ {
+ pos = ((u32)0x01) << pinpos;
+ /* Get the port pins position */
+ currentpin = (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin) & pos;
+
+ if (currentpin == pos)
+ {
+ pos = pinpos << 2;
+ /* Clear the corresponding low control register bits */
+ pinmask = ((u32)0x0F) << pos;
+ tmpreg &= ~pinmask;
+
+ /* Write the mode configuration in the corresponding bits */
+ tmpreg |= (currentmode << pos);
+
+ /* Reset the corresponding ODR bit */
+ if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_IPD)
+ {
+ GPIOx->BRR = (((u32)0x01) << pinpos);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set the corresponding ODR bit */
+ if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_IPU)
+ {
+ GPIOx->BSRR = (((u32)0x01) << pinpos);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ GPIOx->CRL = tmpreg;
+ }
+
+/*---------------------------- GPIO CRH Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Configure the eight high port pins */
+ if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin > 0x00FF)
+ {
+ tmpreg = GPIOx->CRH;
+ for (pinpos = 0x00; pinpos < 0x08; pinpos++)
+ {
+ pos = (((u32)0x01) << (pinpos + 0x08));
+ /* Get the port pins position */
+ currentpin = ((GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin) & pos);
+ if (currentpin == pos)
+ {
+ pos = pinpos << 2;
+ /* Clear the corresponding high control register bits */
+ pinmask = ((u32)0x0F) << pos;
+ tmpreg &= ~pinmask;
+
+ /* Write the mode configuration in the corresponding bits */
+ tmpreg |= (currentmode << pos);
+
+ /* Reset the corresponding ODR bit */
+ if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_IPD)
+ {
+ GPIOx->BRR = (((u32)0x01) << (pinpos + 0x08));
+ }
+ /* Set the corresponding ODR bit */
+ if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_IPU)
+ {
+ GPIOx->BSRR = (((u32)0x01) << (pinpos + 0x08));
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ GPIOx->CRH = tmpreg;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each GPIO_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - GPIO_InitStruct : pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_StructInit(GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* Reset GPIO init structure parameters values */
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin = GPIO_Pin_All;
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed = GPIO_Speed_2MHz;
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_IN_FLOATING;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_ReadInputDataBit
+* Description : Reads the specified input port pin.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* : - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read.
+* This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
+* Output : None
+* Return : The input port pin value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 GPIO_ReadInputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ u8 bitstatus = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ if ((GPIOx->IDR & GPIO_Pin) != (u32)Bit_RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = (u8)Bit_SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = (u8)Bit_RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_ReadInputData
+* Description : Reads the specified GPIO input data port.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : GPIO input data port value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 GPIO_ReadInputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+
+ return ((u16)GPIOx->IDR);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit
+* Description : Reads the specified output data port bit.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* : - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read.
+* This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
+* Output : None
+* Return : The output port pin value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ u8 bitstatus = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ if ((GPIOx->ODR & GPIO_Pin) != (u32)Bit_RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = (u8)Bit_SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = (u8)Bit_RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_ReadOutputData
+* Description : Reads the specified GPIO output data port.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : GPIO output data port value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 GPIO_ReadOutputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+
+ return ((u16)GPIOx->ODR);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_SetBits
+* Description : Sets the selected data port bits.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written.
+* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where
+* x can be (0..15).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_SetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_ResetBits
+* Description : Clears the selected data port bits.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written.
+* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where
+* x can be (0..15).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_ResetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ GPIOx->BRR = GPIO_Pin;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_WriteBit
+* Description : Sets or clears the selected data port bit.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written.
+* This parameter can be one of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
+* - BitVal: specifies the value to be written to the selected bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the BitAction enum values:
+* - Bit_RESET: to clear the port pin
+* - Bit_SET: to set the port pin
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_WriteBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin, BitAction BitVal)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_BIT_ACTION(BitVal));
+
+ if (BitVal != Bit_RESET)
+ {
+ GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ GPIOx->BRR = GPIO_Pin;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_Write
+* Description : Writes data to the specified GPIO data port.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* - PortVal: specifies the value to be written to the port output
+* data register.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_Write(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 PortVal)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+
+ GPIOx->ODR = PortVal;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_PinLockConfig
+* Description : Locks GPIO Pins configuration registers.
+* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+* - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written.
+* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where
+* x can be (0..15).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_PinLockConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ u32 tmp = 0x00010000;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ tmp |= GPIO_Pin;
+ /* Set LCKK bit */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = tmp;
+ /* Reset LCKK bit */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = GPIO_Pin;
+ /* Set LCKK bit */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = tmp;
+ /* Read LCKK bit*/
+ tmp = GPIOx->LCKR;
+ /* Read LCKK bit*/
+ tmp = GPIOx->LCKR;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_EventOutputConfig
+* Description : Selects the GPIO pin used as Event output.
+* Input : - GPIO_PortSource: selects the GPIO port to be used as source
+* for Event output.
+* This parameter can be GPIO_PortSourceGPIOx where x can be
+* (A..E).
+* - GPIO_PinSource: specifies the pin for the Event output.
+* This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_EventOutputConfig(u8 GPIO_PortSource, u8 GPIO_PinSource)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_EVENTOUT_PORT_SOURCE(GPIO_PortSource));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_SOURCE(GPIO_PinSource));
+
+ tmpreg = AFIO->EVCR;
+ /* Clear the PORT[6:4] and PIN[3:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= EVCR_PORTPINCONFIG_MASK;
+ tmpreg |= (u32)GPIO_PortSource << 0x04;
+ tmpreg |= GPIO_PinSource;
+
+ AFIO->EVCR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_EventOutputCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Event Output.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the Event output.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_EventOutputCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) EVCR_EVOE_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_PinRemapConfig
+* Description : Changes the mapping of the specified pin.
+* Input : - GPIO_Remap: selects the pin to remap.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - GPIO_Remap_SPI1
+* - GPIO_Remap_I2C1
+* - GPIO_Remap_USART1
+* - GPIO_Remap_USART2
+* - GPIO_PartialRemap_USART3
+* - GPIO_FullRemap_USART3
+* - GPIO_PartialRemap_TIM1
+* - GPIO_FullRemap_TIM1
+* - GPIO_PartialRemap1_TIM2
+* - GPIO_PartialRemap2_TIM2
+* - GPIO_FullRemap_TIM2
+* - GPIO_PartialRemap_TIM3
+* - GPIO_FullRemap_TIM3
+* - GPIO_Remap_TIM4
+* - GPIO_Remap1_CAN
+* - GPIO_Remap2_CAN
+* - GPIO_Remap_PD01
+* - GPIO_Remap_TIM5CH4_LSI
+* - GPIO_Remap_ADC1_ETRGINJ
+* - GPIO_Remap_ADC1_ETRGREG
+* - GPIO_Remap_ADC2_ETRGINJ
+* - GPIO_Remap_ADC2_ETRGREG
+* - GPIO_Remap_SWJ_NoJTRST
+* - GPIO_Remap_SWJ_JTAGDisable
+* - GPIO_Remap_SWJ_Disable
+* - NewState: new state of the port pin remapping.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_PinRemapConfig(u32 GPIO_Remap, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ u32 tmp = 0x00, tmp1 = 0x00, tmpreg = 0x00, tmpmask = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_REMAP(GPIO_Remap));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ tmpreg = AFIO->MAPR;
+
+ tmpmask = (GPIO_Remap & DBGAFR_POSITION_MASK) >> 0x10;
+ tmp = GPIO_Remap & LSB_MASK;
+
+ if ((GPIO_Remap & (DBGAFR_LOCATION_MASK | DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK)) == (DBGAFR_LOCATION_MASK | DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK))
+ {
+ tmpreg &= DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK;
+ AFIO->MAPR &= DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK;
+ }
+ else if ((GPIO_Remap & DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK) == DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK)
+ {
+ tmp1 = ((u32)0x03) << tmpmask;
+ tmpreg &= ~tmp1;
+ tmpreg |= ~DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpreg &= ~(tmp << ((GPIO_Remap >> 0x15)*0x10));
+ tmpreg |= ~DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK;
+ }
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ tmpreg |= (tmp << ((GPIO_Remap >> 0x15)*0x10));
+ }
+
+ AFIO->MAPR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : GPIO_EXTILineConfig
+* Description : Selects the GPIO pin used as EXTI Line.
+* Input : - GPIO_PortSource: selects the GPIO port to be used as
+* source for EXTI lines.
+* This parameter can be GPIO_PortSourceGPIOx where x can be
+* (A..G).
+* - GPIO_PinSource: specifies the EXTI line to be configured.
+* This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void GPIO_EXTILineConfig(u8 GPIO_PortSource, u8 GPIO_PinSource)
+{
+ u32 tmp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_EXTI_PORT_SOURCE(GPIO_PortSource));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_SOURCE(GPIO_PinSource));
+
+ tmp = ((u32)0x0F) << (0x04 * (GPIO_PinSource & (u8)0x03));
+
+ AFIO->EXTICR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x02] &= ~tmp;
+ AFIO->EXTICR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x02] |= (((u32)GPIO_PortSource) << (0x04 * (GPIO_PinSource & (u8)0x03)));
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_i2c.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_i2c.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..360f71d --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_i2c.c @@ -0,0 +1,1216 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_i2c.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the I2C firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_i2c.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* I2C SPE mask */
+#define CR1_PE_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define CR1_PE_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE)
+
+/* I2C START mask */
+#define CR1_START_Set ((u16)0x0100)
+#define CR1_START_Reset ((u16)0xFEFF)
+
+/* I2C STOP mask */
+#define CR1_STOP_Set ((u16)0x0200)
+#define CR1_STOP_Reset ((u16)0xFDFF)
+
+/* I2C ACK mask */
+#define CR1_ACK_Set ((u16)0x0400)
+#define CR1_ACK_Reset ((u16)0xFBFF)
+
+/* I2C ENGC mask */
+#define CR1_ENGC_Set ((u16)0x0040)
+#define CR1_ENGC_Reset ((u16)0xFFBF)
+
+/* I2C SWRST mask */
+#define CR1_SWRST_Set ((u16)0x8000)
+#define CR1_SWRST_Reset ((u16)0x7FFF)
+
+/* I2C PEC mask */
+#define CR1_PEC_Set ((u16)0x1000)
+#define CR1_PEC_Reset ((u16)0xEFFF)
+
+/* I2C ENPEC mask */
+#define CR1_ENPEC_Set ((u16)0x0020)
+#define CR1_ENPEC_Reset ((u16)0xFFDF)
+
+/* I2C ENARP mask */
+#define CR1_ENARP_Set ((u16)0x0010)
+#define CR1_ENARP_Reset ((u16)0xFFEF)
+
+/* I2C NOSTRETCH mask */
+#define CR1_NOSTRETCH_Set ((u16)0x0080)
+#define CR1_NOSTRETCH_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F)
+
+/* I2C registers Masks */
+#define CR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xFBF5)
+
+/* I2C DMAEN mask */
+#define CR2_DMAEN_Set ((u16)0x0800)
+#define CR2_DMAEN_Reset ((u16)0xF7FF)
+
+/* I2C LAST mask */
+#define CR2_LAST_Set ((u16)0x1000)
+#define CR2_LAST_Reset ((u16)0xEFFF)
+
+/* I2C FREQ mask */
+#define CR2_FREQ_Reset ((u16)0xFFC0)
+
+/* I2C ADD0 mask */
+#define OAR1_ADD0_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define OAR1_ADD0_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE)
+
+/* I2C ENDUAL mask */
+#define OAR2_ENDUAL_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define OAR2_ENDUAL_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE)
+
+/* I2C ADD2 mask */
+#define OAR2_ADD2_Reset ((u16)0xFF01)
+
+/* I2C F/S mask */
+#define CCR_FS_Set ((u16)0x8000)
+
+/* I2C CCR mask */
+#define CCR_CCR_Set ((u16)0x0FFF)
+
+/* I2C FLAG mask */
+#define FLAG_Mask ((u32)0x00FFFFFF)
+
+/* I2C Interrupt Enable mask */
+#define ITEN_Mask ((u32)0x07000000)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the I2Cx peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_DeInit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ switch (*(u32*)&I2Cx)
+ {
+ case I2C1_BASE:
+ /* Enable I2C1 reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, ENABLE);
+ /* Release I2C1 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case I2C2_BASE:
+ /* Enable I2C2 reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2, ENABLE);
+ /* Release I2C2 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_Init
+* Description : Initializes the I2Cx peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the I2C_InitStruct.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_InitStruct: pointer to a I2C_InitTypeDef structure that
+* contains the configuration information for the specified
+* I2C peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_Init(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct)
+{
+ u16 tmpreg = 0, freqrange = 0;
+ u16 result = 0x04;
+ u32 pclk1 = 8000000;
+ RCC_ClocksTypeDef rcc_clocks;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_MODE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_DUTY_CYCLE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_OWN_ADDRESS1(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ACK_STATE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ACKNOWLEDGE_ADDRESS(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_CLOCK_SPEED(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed));
+
+/*---------------------------- I2Cx CR2 Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Get the I2Cx CR2 value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->CR2;
+ /* Clear frequency FREQ[5:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR2_FREQ_Reset;
+ /* Get pclk1 frequency value */
+ RCC_GetClocksFreq(&rcc_clocks);
+ pclk1 = rcc_clocks.PCLK1_Frequency;
+ /* Set frequency bits depending on pclk1 value */
+ freqrange = (u16)(pclk1 / 1000000);
+ tmpreg |= freqrange;
+ /* Write to I2Cx CR2 */
+ I2Cx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+
+/*---------------------------- I2Cx CCR Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Disable the selected I2C peripheral to configure TRISE */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_PE_Reset;
+
+ /* Reset tmpreg value */
+ /* Clear F/S, DUTY and CCR[11:0] bits */
+ tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Configure speed in standard mode */
+ if (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed <= 100000)
+ {
+ /* Standard mode speed calculate */
+ result = (u16)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed << 1));
+ /* Test if CCR value is under 0x4*/
+ if (result < 0x04)
+ {
+ /* Set minimum allowed value */
+ result = 0x04;
+ }
+ /* Set speed value for standard mode */
+ tmpreg |= result;
+ /* Set Maximum Rise Time for standard mode */
+ I2Cx->TRISE = freqrange + 1;
+ }
+ /* Configure speed in fast mode */
+ else /*(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed <= 400000)*/
+ {
+ if (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle == I2C_DutyCycle_2)
+ {
+ /* Fast mode speed calculate: Tlow/Thigh = 2 */
+ result = (u16)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed * 3));
+ }
+ else /*I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle == I2C_DutyCycle_16_9*/
+ {
+ /* Fast mode speed calculate: Tlow/Thigh = 16/9 */
+ result = (u16)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed * 25));
+ /* Set DUTY bit */
+ result |= I2C_DutyCycle_16_9;
+ }
+ /* Test if CCR value is under 0x1*/
+ if ((result & CCR_CCR_Set) == 0)
+ {
+ /* Set minimum allowed value */
+ result |= (u16)0x0001;
+ }
+ /* Set speed value and set F/S bit for fast mode */
+ tmpreg |= result | CCR_FS_Set;
+ /* Set Maximum Rise Time for fast mode */
+ I2Cx->TRISE = (u16)(((freqrange * 300) / 1000) + 1);
+ }
+ /* Write to I2Cx CCR */
+ I2Cx->CCR = tmpreg;
+
+ /* Enable the selected I2C peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_PE_Set;
+
+/*---------------------------- I2Cx CR1 Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Get the I2Cx CR1 value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->CR1;
+ /* Clear ACK, SMBTYPE and SMBUS bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_Mask;
+ /* Configure I2Cx: mode and acknowledgement */
+ /* Set SMBTYPE and SMBUS bits according to I2C_Mode value */
+ /* Set ACK bit according to I2C_Ack value */
+ tmpreg |= (u16)((u32)I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode | I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack);
+ /* Write to I2Cx CR1 */
+ I2Cx->CR1 = tmpreg;
+
+/*---------------------------- I2Cx OAR1 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Set I2Cx Own Address1 and acknowledged address */
+ I2Cx->OAR1 = (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress | I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each I2C_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - I2C_InitStruct: pointer to an I2C_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_StructInit(I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct)
+{
+/*---------------- Reset I2C init structure parameters values ----------------*/
+ /* Initialize the I2C_Mode member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode = I2C_Mode_I2C;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2C_DutyCycle member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle = I2C_DutyCycle_2;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2C_OwnAddress1 member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1 = 0;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2C_Ack member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack = I2C_Ack_Disable;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2C_AcknowledgedAddress member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress = I2C_AcknowledgedAddress_7bit;
+
+ /* initialize the I2C_ClockSpeed member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed = 5000;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_Cmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C peripheral.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2Cx peripheral. This parameter
+* can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_Cmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_PE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_PE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_DMACmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C DMA requests.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C DMA transfer.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_DMACmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C DMA requests */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= CR2_DMAEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C DMA requests */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= CR2_DMAEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_DMALastTransferCmd
+* Description : Specifies that the next DMA transfer is the last one.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C DMA last transfer.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_DMALastTransferCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Next DMA transfer is the last transfer */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= CR2_LAST_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Next DMA transfer is not the last transfer */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= CR2_LAST_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_GenerateSTART
+* Description : Generates I2Cx communication START condition.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C START condition generation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_GenerateSTART(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Generate a START condition */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_START_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the START condition generation */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_START_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_GenerateSTOP
+* Description : Generates I2Cx communication STOP condition.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C STOP condition generation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_GenerateSTOP(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Generate a STOP condition */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_STOP_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the STOP condition generation */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_STOP_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_AcknowledgeConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C acknowledge feature.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C Acknowledgement.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_AcknowledgeConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the acknowledgement */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_ACK_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the acknowledgement */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_ACK_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_OwnAddress2Config
+* Description : Configures the specified I2C own address2.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - Address: specifies the 7bit I2C own address2.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_OwnAddress2Config(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u8 Address)
+{
+ u16 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->OAR2;
+ /* Reset I2Cx Own address2 bit [7:1] */
+ tmpreg &= OAR2_ADD2_Reset;
+ /* Set I2Cx Own address2 */
+ tmpreg |= (u16)(Address & (u16)0x00FE);
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ I2Cx->OAR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_DualAddressCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C dual addressing mode.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C dual addressing mode.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_DualAddressCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable dual addressing mode */
+ I2Cx->OAR2 |= OAR2_ENDUAL_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable dual addressing mode */
+ I2Cx->OAR2 &= OAR2_ENDUAL_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_GeneralCallCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C general call feature.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C General call.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_GeneralCallCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable generall call */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_ENGC_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable generall call */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_ENGC_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C interrupts.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_IT: specifies the I2C interrupts sources to be enabled
+* or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - I2C_IT_BUF: Buffer interrupt mask
+* - I2C_IT_EVT: Event interrupt mask
+* - I2C_IT_ERR: Error interrupt mask
+* - NewState: new state of the specified I2C interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_ITConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u16 I2C_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_CONFIG_IT(I2C_IT));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C interrupts */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C interrupts */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (u16)~I2C_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_SendData
+* Description : Sends a data byte through the I2Cx peripheral.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - Data: Byte to be transmitted..
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_SendData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u8 Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Write in the DR register the data to be sent */
+ I2Cx->DR = Data;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_ReceiveData
+* Description : Returns the most recent received data by the I2Cx peripheral.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The value of the received data.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 I2C_ReceiveData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Return the data in the DR register */
+ return (u8)I2Cx->DR;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_Send7bitAddress
+* Description : Transmits the address byte to select the slave device.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - Address: specifies the slave address which will be transmitted
+* - I2C_Direction: specifies whether the I2C device will be a
+* Transmitter or a Receiver.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values
+* - I2C_Direction_Transmitter: Transmitter mode
+* - I2C_Direction_Receiver: Receiver mode
+* Output : None
+* Return : None.
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_Send7bitAddress(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u8 Address, u8 I2C_Direction)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_DIRECTION(I2C_Direction));
+
+ /* Test on the direction to set/reset the read/write bit */
+ if (I2C_Direction != I2C_Direction_Transmitter)
+ {
+ /* Set the address bit0 for read */
+ Address |= OAR1_ADD0_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the address bit0 for write */
+ Address &= OAR1_ADD0_Reset;
+ }
+ /* Send the address */
+ I2Cx->DR = Address;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_ReadRegister
+* Description : Reads the specified I2C register and returns its value.
+* Input1 : - I2C_Register: specifies the register to read.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - I2C_Register_CR1: CR1 register.
+* - I2C_Register_CR2: CR2 register.
+* - I2C_Register_OAR1: OAR1 register.
+* - I2C_Register_OAR2: OAR2 register.
+* - I2C_Register_DR: DR register.
+* - I2C_Register_SR1: SR1 register.
+* - I2C_Register_SR2: SR2 register.
+* - I2C_Register_CCR: CCR register.
+* - I2C_Register_TRISE: TRISE register.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The value of the read register.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 I2C_ReadRegister(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u8 I2C_Register)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_REGISTER(I2C_Register));
+
+ /* Return the selected register value */
+ return (*(vu16 *)(*((vu32 *)&I2Cx) + I2C_Register));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_SoftwareResetCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C software reset.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C software reset.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_SoftwareResetCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Peripheral under reset */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_SWRST_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Peripheral not under reset */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_SWRST_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_SMBusAlertConfig
+* Description : Drives the SMBusAlert pin high or low for the specified I2C.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_SMBusAlert: specifies SMBAlert pin level.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - I2C_SMBusAlert_Low: SMBAlert pin driven low
+* - I2C_SMBusAlert_High: SMBAlert pin driven high
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_SMBusAlertConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u16 I2C_SMBusAlert)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_SMBUS_ALERT(I2C_SMBusAlert));
+
+ if (I2C_SMBusAlert == I2C_SMBusAlert_Low)
+ {
+ /* Drive the SMBusAlert pin Low */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_SMBusAlert_Low;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Drive the SMBusAlert pin High */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= I2C_SMBusAlert_High;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_TransmitPEC
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C PEC transfer.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2C PEC transmission.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_TransmitPEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C PEC transmission */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_PEC_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C PEC transmission */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_PEC_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_PECPositionConfig
+* Description : Selects the specified I2C PEC position.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_PECPosition: specifies the PEC position.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - I2C_PECPosition_Next: indicates that the next
+* byte is PEC
+* - I2C_PECPosition_Current: indicates that current
+* byte is PEC
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_PECPositionConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u16 I2C_PECPosition)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_PEC_POSITION(I2C_PECPosition));
+
+ if (I2C_PECPosition == I2C_PECPosition_Next)
+ {
+ /* Next byte in shift register is PEC */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_PECPosition_Next;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Current byte in shift register is PEC */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= I2C_PECPosition_Current;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_CalculatePEC
+* Description : Enables or disables the PEC value calculation of the
+* transfered bytes.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2Cx PEC value calculation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_CalculatePEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C PEC calculation */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_ENPEC_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C PEC calculation */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_ENPEC_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_GetPEC
+* Description : Returns the PEC value for the specified I2C.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The PEC value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 I2C_GetPEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Return the selected I2C PEC value */
+ return ((I2Cx->SR2) >> 8);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_ARPCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C ARP.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2Cx ARP.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_ARPCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C ARP */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_ENARP_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C ARP */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_ENARP_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_StretchClockCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C Clock stretching.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the I2Cx Clock stretching.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_StretchClockCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState == DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C Clock stretching */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_NOSTRETCH_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C Clock stretching */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_NOSTRETCH_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_FastModeDutyCycleConfig
+* Description : Selects the specified I2C fast mode duty cycle.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_DutyCycle: specifies the fast mode duty cycle.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - I2C_DutyCycle_2: I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh = 2
+* - I2C_DutyCycle_16_9: I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh = 16/9
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_FastModeDutyCycleConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u16 I2C_DutyCycle)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_DUTY_CYCLE(I2C_DutyCycle));
+
+ if (I2C_DutyCycle != I2C_DutyCycle_16_9)
+ {
+ /* I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh=2 */
+ I2Cx->CCR &= I2C_DutyCycle_2;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh=16/9 */
+ I2Cx->CCR |= I2C_DutyCycle_16_9;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_GetLastEvent
+* Description : Returns the last I2Cx Event.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The last event
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 I2C_GetLastEvent(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ u32 lastevent = 0;
+ u32 flag1 = 0, flag2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Read the I2Cx status register */
+ flag1 = I2Cx->SR1;
+ flag2 = I2Cx->SR2;
+ flag2 = flag2 << 16;
+
+ /* Get the last event value from I2C status register */
+ lastevent = (flag1 | flag2) & FLAG_Mask;
+
+ /* Return status */
+ return lastevent;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_CheckEvent
+* Description : Checks whether the last I2Cx Event is equal to the one passed
+* as parameter.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_EVENT: specifies the event to be checked.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_ADDRESS_MATCHED : EV1
+* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_RECEIVED : EV2
+* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_TRANSMITTED : EV3
+* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_ACK_FAILURE : EV3-2
+* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_MODE_SELECT : EV5
+* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_MODE_SELECTED : EV6
+* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_BYTE_RECEIVED : EV7
+* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_BYTE_TRANSMITTED : EV8
+* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_MODE_ADDRESS10 : EV9
+* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_STOP_DETECTED : EV4
+* Output : None
+* Return : An ErrorStatus enumuration value:
+* - SUCCESS: Last event is equal to the I2C_EVENT
+* - ERROR: Last event is different from the I2C_EVENT
+*******************************************************************************/
+ErrorStatus I2C_CheckEvent(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_EVENT)
+{
+ u32 lastevent = 0;
+ u32 flag1 = 0, flag2 = 0;
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_EVENT(I2C_EVENT));
+
+ /* Read the I2Cx status register */
+ flag1 = I2Cx->SR1;
+ flag2 = I2Cx->SR2;
+ flag2 = flag2 << 16;
+
+ /* Get the last event value from I2C status register */
+ lastevent = (flag1 | flag2) & FLAG_Mask;
+
+ /* Check whether the last event is equal to I2C_EVENT */
+ if (lastevent == I2C_EVENT )
+ {
+ /* SUCCESS: last event is equal to I2C_EVENT */
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* ERROR: last event is different from I2C_EVENT */
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Return status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified I2C flag is set or not.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - I2C_FLAG_DUALF: Dual flag (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_SMBHOST: SMBus host header (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_SMBDEFAULT: SMBus default header (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_GENCALL: General call header flag (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_TRA: Transmitter/Receiver flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_BUSY: Bus busy flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_MSL: Master/Slave flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_AF: Acknowledge failure flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_BERR: Bus error flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_TXE: Data register empty flag (Transmitter)
+* - I2C_FLAG_RXNE: Data register not empty (Receiver) flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_STOPF: Stop detection flag (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_ADD10: 10-bit header sent flag (Master mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_BTF: Byte transfer finished flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_ADDR: Address sent flag (Master mode) “ADSL”
+* Address matched flag (Slave mode)”ENDAD”
+* - I2C_FLAG_SB: Start bit flag (Master mode)
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of I2C_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus I2C_GetFlagStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 i2creg = 0, i2cxbase = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_GET_FLAG(I2C_FLAG));
+
+ /* Get the I2Cx peripheral base address */
+ i2cxbase = (*(u32*)&(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Read flag register index */
+ i2creg = I2C_FLAG >> 28;
+
+ /* Get bit[23:0] of the flag */
+ I2C_FLAG &= FLAG_Mask;
+
+ if(i2creg != 0)
+ {
+ /* Get the I2Cx SR1 register address */
+ i2cxbase += 0x14;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Flag in I2Cx SR2 Register */
+ I2C_FLAG = (u32)(I2C_FLAG >> 16);
+ /* Get the I2Cx SR2 register address */
+ i2cxbase += 0x18;
+ }
+
+ if(((*(vu32 *)i2cxbase) & I2C_FLAG) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ /* I2C_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* I2C_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the I2C_FLAG status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the I2Cx's pending flags.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following
+* values:
+* - I2C_FLAG_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_AF: Acknowledge failure flag
+* - I2C_FLAG_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode)
+* - I2C_FLAG_BERR: Bus error flag
+*
+* Notes:
+* - STOPF (STOP detection) is cleared by software
+* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 register
+* (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation
+* to I2C_CR1 register (I2C_Cmd() to re-enable the
+* I2C peripheral).
+* - ADD10 (10-bit header sent) is cleared by software
+* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1
+* (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by writing the
+* second byte of the address in DR register.
+* - BTF (Byte Transfer Finished) is cleared by software
+* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 register
+* (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a read/write to
+* I2C_DR register (I2C_SendData()).
+* - ADDR (Address sent) is cleared by software sequence:
+* a read operation to I2C_SR1 register
+* (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a read operation to
+* I2C_SR2 register ((void)(I2Cx->SR2)).
+* - SB (Start Bit) is cleared software sequence: a read
+* operation to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetFlagStatus())
+* followed by a write operation to I2C_DR reigister
+* (I2C_SendData()).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_ClearFlag(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_FLAG)
+{
+ u32 flagpos = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_CLEAR_FLAG(I2C_FLAG));
+
+ /* Get the I2C flag position */
+ flagpos = I2C_FLAG & FLAG_Mask;
+
+ /* Clear the selected I2C flag */
+ I2Cx->SR1 = (u16)~flagpos;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified I2C interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_IT: specifies the interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - I2C_IT_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag
+* - I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag
+* - I2C_IT_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag
+* - I2C_IT_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_IT_AF: Acknowledge failure flag
+* - I2C_IT_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode)
+* - I2C_IT_BERR: Bus error flag
+* - I2C_IT_TXE: Data register empty flag (Transmitter)
+* - I2C_IT_RXNE: Data register not empty (Receiver) flag
+* - I2C_IT_STOPF: Stop detection flag (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_IT_ADD10: 10-bit header sent flag (Master mode)
+* - I2C_IT_BTF: Byte transfer finished flag
+* - I2C_IT_ADDR: Address sent flag (Master mode) “ADSL”
+* Address matched flag (Slave mode)”ENDAD”
+* - I2C_IT_SB: Start bit flag (Master mode)
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of I2C_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus I2C_GetITStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 enablestatus = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_GET_IT(I2C_IT));
+
+ /* Check if the interrupt source is enabled or not */
+ enablestatus = (u32)(((I2C_IT & ITEN_Mask) >> 16) & (I2Cx->CR2)) ;
+
+ /* Get bit[23:0] of the flag */
+ I2C_IT &= FLAG_Mask;
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified I2C flag */
+ if (((I2Cx->SR1 & I2C_IT) != (u32)RESET) && enablestatus)
+ {
+ /* I2C_IT is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* I2C_IT is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the I2C_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2C_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the I2Cx’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+* - I2C_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following
+* values:
+* - I2C_IT_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert interrupt
+* - I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error interrupt
+* - I2C_IT_PECERR: PEC error in reception interrupt
+* - I2C_IT_OVR: Overrun/Underrun interrupt (Slave mode)
+* - I2C_IT_AF: Acknowledge failure interrupt
+* - I2C_IT_ARLO: Arbitration lost interrupt (Master mode)
+* - I2C_IT_BERR: Bus error interrupt
+*
+* Notes:
+* - STOPF (STOP detection) is cleared by software
+* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 register
+* (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by a write operation to
+* I2C_CR1 register (I2C_Cmd() to re-enable the I2C
+* peripheral).
+* - ADD10 (10-bit header sent) is cleared by software
+* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1
+* (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by writing the second
+* byte of the address in I2C_DR register.
+* - BTF (Byte Transfer Finished) is cleared by software
+* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 register
+* (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by a read/write to
+* I2C_DR register (I2C_SendData()).
+* - ADDR (Address sent) is cleared by software sequence:
+* a read operation to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetITStatus())
+* followed by a read operation to I2C_SR2 register
+* ((void)(I2Cx->SR2)).
+* - SB (Start Bit) is cleared by software sequence: a
+* read operation to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetITStatus())
+* followed by a write operation to I2C_DR reigister
+* (I2C_SendData()).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2C_ClearITPendingBit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_IT)
+{
+ u32 flagpos = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_CLEAR_IT(I2C_IT));
+
+ /* Get the I2C flag position */
+ flagpos = I2C_IT & FLAG_Mask;
+
+ /* Clear the selected I2C flag */
+ I2Cx->SR1 = (u16)~flagpos;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_iwdg.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_iwdg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..77cb094 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_iwdg.c @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_iwdg.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the IWDG firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_iwdg.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ---------------------- IWDG registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+/* KR register bit mask */
+#define KR_KEY_Reload ((u16)0xAAAA)
+#define KR_KEY_Enable ((u16)0xCCCC)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : IWDG_WriteAccessCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR
+* registers.
+* Input : - IWDG_WriteAccess: new state of write access to IWDG_PR and
+* IWDG_RLR registers.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable: Enable write access to
+* IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers
+* - IWDG_WriteAccess_Disable: Disable write access to
+* IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(u16 IWDG_WriteAccess)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_WRITE_ACCESS(IWDG_WriteAccess));
+
+ IWDG->KR = IWDG_WriteAccess;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : IWDG_SetPrescaler
+* Description : Sets IWDG Prescaler value.
+* Input : - IWDG_Prescaler: specifies the IWDG Prescaler value.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - IWDG_Prescaler_4: IWDG prescaler set to 4
+* - IWDG_Prescaler_8: IWDG prescaler set to 8
+* - IWDG_Prescaler_16: IWDG prescaler set to 16
+* - IWDG_Prescaler_32: IWDG prescaler set to 32
+* - IWDG_Prescaler_64: IWDG prescaler set to 64
+* - IWDG_Prescaler_128: IWDG prescaler set to 128
+* - IWDG_Prescaler_256: IWDG prescaler set to 256
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void IWDG_SetPrescaler(u8 IWDG_Prescaler)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_PRESCALER(IWDG_Prescaler));
+
+ IWDG->PR = IWDG_Prescaler;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : IWDG_SetReload
+* Description : Sets IWDG Reload value.
+* Input : - Reload: specifies the IWDG Reload value.
+* This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x0FFF.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void IWDG_SetReload(u16 Reload)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_RELOAD(Reload));
+
+ IWDG->RLR = Reload;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : IWDG_ReloadCounter
+* Description : Reloads IWDG counter with value defined in the reload register
+* (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled).
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void IWDG_ReloadCounter(void)
+{
+ IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_Reload;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : IWDG_Enable
+* Description : Enables IWDG (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers
+* disabled).
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void IWDG_Enable(void)
+{
+ IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_Enable;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : IWDG_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified IWDG flag is set or not.
+* Input : - IWDG_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - IWDG_FLAG_PVU: Prescaler Value Update on going
+* - IWDG_FLAG_RVU: Reload Value Update on going
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of IWDG_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus IWDG_GetFlagStatus(u16 IWDG_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_FLAG(IWDG_FLAG));
+
+ if ((IWDG->SR & IWDG_FLAG) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the flag status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_lib.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_lib.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..21d5ce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_lib.c @@ -0,0 +1,303 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_lib.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all peripherals pointers initialization.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+#define EXT
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_lib.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifdef DEBUG
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : debug
+* Description : This function initialize peripherals pointers.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void debug(void)
+{
+
+/************************************* ADC ************************************/
+#ifdef _ADC1
+ ADC1 = (ADC_TypeDef *) ADC1_BASE;
+#endif /*_ADC1 */
+
+#ifdef _ADC2
+ ADC2 = (ADC_TypeDef *) ADC2_BASE;
+#endif /*_ADC2 */
+
+#ifdef _ADC3
+ ADC3 = (ADC_TypeDef *) ADC3_BASE;
+#endif /*_ADC3 */
+
+/************************************* BKP ************************************/
+#ifdef _BKP
+ BKP = (BKP_TypeDef *) BKP_BASE;
+#endif /*_BKP */
+
+/************************************* CAN ************************************/
+#ifdef _CAN
+ CAN = (CAN_TypeDef *) CAN_BASE;
+#endif /*_CAN */
+
+/************************************* CRC ************************************/
+#ifdef _CRC
+ CRC = (CRC_TypeDef *) CRC_BASE;
+#endif /*_CRC */
+
+/************************************* DAC ************************************/
+#ifdef _DAC
+ DAC = (DAC_TypeDef *) DAC_BASE;
+#endif /*_DAC */
+
+/************************************* DBGMCU**********************************/
+#ifdef _DBGMCU
+ DBGMCU = (DBGMCU_TypeDef *) DBGMCU_BASE;
+#endif /*_DBGMCU */
+
+/************************************* DMA ************************************/
+#ifdef _DMA
+ DMA1 = (DMA_TypeDef *) DMA1_BASE;
+ DMA2 = (DMA_TypeDef *) DMA2_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA */
+
+#ifdef _DMA1_Channel1
+ DMA1_Channel1 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel1_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA1_Channel1 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA1_Channel2
+ DMA1_Channel2 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel2_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA1_Channel2 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA1_Channel3
+ DMA1_Channel3 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel3_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA1_Channel3 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA1_Channel4
+ DMA1_Channel4 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel4_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA1_Channel4 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA1_Channel5
+ DMA1_Channel5 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel5_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA1_Channel5 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA1_Channel6
+ DMA1_Channel6 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel6_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA1_Channel6 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA1_Channel7
+ DMA1_Channel7 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel7_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA1_Channel7 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA2_Channel1
+ DMA2_Channel1 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel1_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA2_Channel1 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA2_Channel2
+ DMA2_Channel2 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel2_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA2_Channel2 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA2_Channel3
+ DMA2_Channel3 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel3_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA2_Channel3 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA2_Channel4
+ DMA2_Channel4 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel4_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA2_Channel4 */
+
+#ifdef _DMA2_Channel5
+ DMA2_Channel5 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel5_BASE;
+#endif /*_DMA2_Channel5 */
+
+/************************************* EXTI ***********************************/
+#ifdef _EXTI
+ EXTI = (EXTI_TypeDef *) EXTI_BASE;
+#endif /*_EXTI */
+
+/************************************* FLASH and Option Bytes *****************/
+#ifdef _FLASH
+ FLASH = (FLASH_TypeDef *) FLASH_R_BASE;
+ OB = (OB_TypeDef *) OB_BASE;
+#endif /*_FLASH */
+
+/************************************* FSMC ***********************************/
+#ifdef _FSMC
+ FSMC_Bank1 = (FSMC_Bank1_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank1_R_BASE;
+ FSMC_Bank1E = (FSMC_Bank1E_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank1E_R_BASE;
+ FSMC_Bank2 = (FSMC_Bank2_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank2_R_BASE;
+ FSMC_Bank3 = (FSMC_Bank3_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank3_R_BASE;
+ FSMC_Bank4 = (FSMC_Bank4_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank4_R_BASE;
+#endif /*_FSMC */
+
+/************************************* GPIO ***********************************/
+#ifdef _GPIOA
+ GPIOA = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOA_BASE;
+#endif /*_GPIOA */
+
+#ifdef _GPIOB
+ GPIOB = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOB_BASE;
+#endif /*_GPIOB */
+
+#ifdef _GPIOC
+ GPIOC = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOC_BASE;
+#endif /*_GPIOC */
+
+#ifdef _GPIOD
+ GPIOD = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOD_BASE;
+#endif /*_GPIOD */
+
+#ifdef _GPIOE
+ GPIOE = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOE_BASE;
+#endif /*_GPIOE */
+
+#ifdef _GPIOF
+ GPIOF = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOF_BASE;
+#endif /*_GPIOF */
+
+#ifdef _GPIOG
+ GPIOG = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOG_BASE;
+#endif /*_GPIOG */
+
+#ifdef _AFIO
+ AFIO = (AFIO_TypeDef *) AFIO_BASE;
+#endif /*_AFIO */
+
+/************************************* I2C ************************************/
+#ifdef _I2C1
+ I2C1 = (I2C_TypeDef *) I2C1_BASE;
+#endif /*_I2C1 */
+
+#ifdef _I2C2
+ I2C2 = (I2C_TypeDef *) I2C2_BASE;
+#endif /*_I2C2 */
+
+/************************************* IWDG ***********************************/
+#ifdef _IWDG
+ IWDG = (IWDG_TypeDef *) IWDG_BASE;
+#endif /*_IWDG */
+
+/************************************* NVIC ***********************************/
+#ifdef _NVIC
+ NVIC = (NVIC_TypeDef *) NVIC_BASE;
+ SCB = (SCB_TypeDef *) SCB_BASE;
+#endif /*_NVIC */
+
+/************************************* PWR ************************************/
+#ifdef _PWR
+ PWR = (PWR_TypeDef *) PWR_BASE;
+#endif /*_PWR */
+
+/************************************* RCC ************************************/
+#ifdef _RCC
+ RCC = (RCC_TypeDef *) RCC_BASE;
+#endif /*_RCC */
+
+/************************************* RTC ************************************/
+#ifdef _RTC
+ RTC = (RTC_TypeDef *) RTC_BASE;
+#endif /*_RTC */
+
+/************************************* SDIO ***********************************/
+#ifdef _SDIO
+ SDIO = (SDIO_TypeDef *) SDIO_BASE;
+#endif /*_SDIO */
+
+/************************************* SPI ************************************/
+#ifdef _SPI1
+ SPI1 = (SPI_TypeDef *) SPI1_BASE;
+#endif /*_SPI1 */
+
+#ifdef _SPI2
+ SPI2 = (SPI_TypeDef *) SPI2_BASE;
+#endif /*_SPI2 */
+
+#ifdef _SPI3
+ SPI3 = (SPI_TypeDef *) SPI3_BASE;
+#endif /*_SPI3 */
+
+/************************************* SysTick ********************************/
+#ifdef _SysTick
+ SysTick = (SysTick_TypeDef *) SysTick_BASE;
+#endif /*_SysTick */
+
+/************************************* TIM ************************************/
+#ifdef _TIM1
+ TIM1 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM1_BASE;
+#endif /*_TIM1 */
+
+#ifdef _TIM2
+ TIM2 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM2_BASE;
+#endif /*_TIM2 */
+
+#ifdef _TIM3
+ TIM3 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM3_BASE;
+#endif /*_TIM3 */
+
+#ifdef _TIM4
+ TIM4 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM4_BASE;
+#endif /*_TIM4 */
+
+#ifdef _TIM5
+ TIM5 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM5_BASE;
+#endif /*_TIM5 */
+
+#ifdef _TIM6
+ TIM6 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM6_BASE;
+#endif /*_TIM6 */
+
+#ifdef _TIM7
+ TIM7 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM7_BASE;
+#endif /*_TIM7 */
+
+#ifdef _TIM8
+ TIM8 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM8_BASE;
+#endif /*_TIM8 */
+
+/************************************* USART **********************************/
+#ifdef _USART1
+ USART1 = (USART_TypeDef *) USART1_BASE;
+#endif /*_USART1 */
+
+#ifdef _USART2
+ USART2 = (USART_TypeDef *) USART2_BASE;
+#endif /*_USART2 */
+
+#ifdef _USART3
+ USART3 = (USART_TypeDef *) USART3_BASE;
+#endif /*_USART3 */
+
+#ifdef _UART4
+ UART4 = (USART_TypeDef *) UART4_BASE;
+#endif /*_UART4 */
+
+#ifdef _UART5
+ UART5 = (USART_TypeDef *) UART5_BASE;
+#endif /*_UART5 */
+
+/************************************* WWDG ***********************************/
+#ifdef _WWDG
+ WWDG = (WWDG_TypeDef *) WWDG_BASE;
+#endif /*_WWDG */
+}
+#endif /* DEBUG*/
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_nvic.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_nvic.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0ce30af --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_nvic.c @@ -0,0 +1,751 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_nvic.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the NVIC firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_nvic.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK ((u32)0x05FA0000)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the NVIC peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_DeInit(void)
+{
+ u32 index = 0;
+
+ NVIC->ICER[0] = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+ NVIC->ICER[1] = 0x0FFFFFFF;
+ NVIC->ICPR[0] = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+ NVIC->ICPR[1] = 0x0FFFFFFF;
+
+ for(index = 0; index < 0x0F; index++)
+ {
+ NVIC->IPR[index] = 0x00000000;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SCBDeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the SCB peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SCBDeInit(void)
+{
+ u32 index = 0x00;
+
+ SCB->ICSR = 0x0A000000;
+ SCB->VTOR = 0x00000000;
+ SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK;
+ SCB->SCR = 0x00000000;
+ SCB->CCR = 0x00000000;
+ for(index = 0; index < 0x03; index++)
+ {
+ SCB->SHPR[index] = 0;
+ }
+ SCB->SHCSR = 0x00000000;
+ SCB->CFSR = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+ SCB->HFSR = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+ SCB->DFSR = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig
+* Description : Configures the priority grouping: pre-emption priority
+* and subpriority.
+* Input : - NVIC_PriorityGroup: specifies the priority grouping bits
+* length. This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_0: 0 bits for pre-emption priority
+* 4 bits for subpriority
+* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_1: 1 bits for pre-emption priority
+* 3 bits for subpriority
+* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_2: 2 bits for pre-emption priority
+* 2 bits for subpriority
+* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_3: 3 bits for pre-emption priority
+* 1 bits for subpriority
+* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_4: 4 bits for pre-emption priority
+* 0 bits for subpriority
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig(u32 NVIC_PriorityGroup)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY_GROUP(NVIC_PriorityGroup));
+
+ /* Set the PRIGROUP[10:8] bits according to NVIC_PriorityGroup value */
+ SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK | NVIC_PriorityGroup;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_Init
+* Description : Initializes the NVIC peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the NVIC_InitStruct.
+* Input : - NVIC_InitStruct: pointer to a NVIC_InitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the
+* specified NVIC peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_Init(NVIC_InitTypeDef* NVIC_InitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmppriority = 0x00, tmpreg = 0x00, tmpmask = 0x00;
+ u32 tmppre = 0, tmpsub = 0x0F;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd));
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel));
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_PREEMPTION_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority));
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_SUB_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority));
+
+ if (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Compute the Corresponding IRQ Priority --------------------------------*/
+ tmppriority = (0x700 - (SCB->AIRCR & (u32)0x700))>> 0x08;
+ tmppre = (0x4 - tmppriority);
+ tmpsub = tmpsub >> tmppriority;
+
+ tmppriority = (u32)NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority << tmppre;
+ tmppriority |= NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority & tmpsub;
+
+ tmppriority = tmppriority << 0x04;
+ tmppriority = ((u32)tmppriority) << ((NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (u8)0x03) * 0x08);
+
+ tmpreg = NVIC->IPR[(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x02)];
+ tmpmask = (u32)0xFF << ((NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (u8)0x03) * 0x08);
+ tmpreg &= ~tmpmask;
+ tmppriority &= tmpmask;
+ tmpreg |= tmppriority;
+
+ NVIC->IPR[(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x02)] = tmpreg;
+
+ /* Enable the Selected IRQ Channels --------------------------------------*/
+ NVIC->ISER[(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)] =
+ (u32)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (u8)0x1F);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Selected IRQ Channels -------------------------------------*/
+ NVIC->ICER[(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)] =
+ (u32)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (u8)0x1F);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each NVIC_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - NVIC_InitStruct: pointer to a NVIC_InitTypeDef structure which
+* will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_StructInit(NVIC_InitTypeDef* NVIC_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* NVIC_InitStruct members default value */
+ NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel = 0x00;
+ NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority = 0x00;
+ NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority = 0x00;
+ NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd = DISABLE;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SETPRIMASK
+* Description : Enables the PRIMASK priority: Raises the execution priority to 0.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SETPRIMASK(void)
+{
+ __SETPRIMASK();
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_RESETPRIMASK
+* Description : Disables the PRIMASK priority.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_RESETPRIMASK(void)
+{
+ __RESETPRIMASK();
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SETFAULTMASK
+* Description : Enables the FAULTMASK priority: Raises the execution priority to -1.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SETFAULTMASK(void)
+{
+ __SETFAULTMASK();
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_RESETFAULTMASK
+* Description : Disables the FAULTMASK priority.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_RESETFAULTMASK(void)
+{
+ __RESETFAULTMASK();
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_BASEPRICONFIG
+* Description : The execution priority can be changed from 15 (lowest
+ configurable priority) to 1. Writing a zero value will disable
+* the mask of execution priority.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_BASEPRICONFIG(u32 NewPriority)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_BASE_PRI(NewPriority));
+
+ __BASEPRICONFIG(NewPriority << 0x04);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetBASEPRI
+* Description : Returns the BASEPRI mask value.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : BASEPRI register value
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 NVIC_GetBASEPRI(void)
+{
+ return (__GetBASEPRI());
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetCurrentPendingIRQChannel
+* Description : Returns the current pending IRQ channel identifier.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Pending IRQ Channel Identifier.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 NVIC_GetCurrentPendingIRQChannel(void)
+{
+ return ((u16)((SCB->ICSR & (u32)0x003FF000) >> 0x0C));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetIRQChannelPendingBitStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified IRQ Channel pending bit is set
+* or not.
+* Input : - NVIC_IRQChannel: specifies the interrupt pending bit to check.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of IRQ Channel pending bit(SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus NVIC_GetIRQChannelPendingBitStatus(u8 NVIC_IRQChannel)
+{
+ ITStatus pendingirqstatus = RESET;
+ u32 tmp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_IRQChannel));
+
+ tmp = ((u32)0x01 << (NVIC_IRQChannel & (u32)0x1F));
+
+ if (((NVIC->ISPR[(NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)]) & tmp) == tmp)
+ {
+ pendingirqstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ pendingirqstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return pendingirqstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SetIRQChannelPendingBit
+* Description : Sets the NVIC’s interrupt pending bit.
+* Input : - NVIC_IRQChannel: specifies the interrupt pending bit to Set.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SetIRQChannelPendingBit(u8 NVIC_IRQChannel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_IRQChannel));
+
+ *(vu32*) 0xE000EF00 = (u32)NVIC_IRQChannel;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_ClearIRQChannelPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the NVIC’s interrupt pending bit.
+* Input : - NVIC_IRQChannel: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_ClearIRQChannelPendingBit(u8 NVIC_IRQChannel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_IRQChannel));
+
+ NVIC->ICPR[(NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)] = (u32)0x01 << (NVIC_IRQChannel & (u32)0x1F);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetCurrentActiveHandler
+* Description : Returns the current active Handler (IRQ Channel and
+* SystemHandler) identifier.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Active Handler Identifier.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 NVIC_GetCurrentActiveHandler(void)
+{
+ return ((u16)(SCB->ICSR & (u32)0x3FF));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetIRQChannelActiveBitStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified IRQ Channel active bit is set
+* or not.
+* Input : - NVIC_IRQChannel: specifies the interrupt active bit to check.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of IRQ Channel active bit(SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus NVIC_GetIRQChannelActiveBitStatus(u8 NVIC_IRQChannel)
+{
+ ITStatus activeirqstatus = RESET;
+ u32 tmp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_IRQChannel));
+
+ tmp = ((u32)0x01 << (NVIC_IRQChannel & (u32)0x1F));
+
+ if (((NVIC->IABR[(NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)]) & tmp) == tmp )
+ {
+ activeirqstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ activeirqstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return activeirqstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetCPUID
+* Description : Returns the ID number, the version number and the implementation
+* details of the Cortex-M3 core.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : CPU ID.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 NVIC_GetCPUID(void)
+{
+ return (SCB->CPUID);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SetVectorTable
+* Description : Sets the vector table location and Offset.
+* Input : - NVIC_VectTab: specifies if the vector table is in RAM or
+* FLASH memory.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - NVIC_VectTab_RAM
+* - NVIC_VectTab_FLASH
+* - Offset: Vector Table base offset field.
+* This value must be a multiple of 0x100.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SetVectorTable(u32 NVIC_VectTab, u32 Offset)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_VECTTAB(NVIC_VectTab));
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_OFFSET(Offset));
+
+ SCB->VTOR = NVIC_VectTab | (Offset & (u32)0x1FFFFF80);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GenerateSystemReset
+* Description : Generates a system reset.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_GenerateSystemReset(void)
+{
+ SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK | (u32)0x04;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GenerateCoreReset
+* Description : Generates a Core (Core + NVIC) reset.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_GenerateCoreReset(void)
+{
+ SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK | (u32)0x01;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SystemLPConfig
+* Description : Selects the condition for the system to enter low power mode.
+* Input : - LowPowerMode: Specifies the new mode for the system to enter
+* low power mode.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - NVIC_LP_SEVONPEND
+* - NVIC_LP_SLEEPDEEP
+* - NVIC_LP_SLEEPONEXIT
+* - NewState: new state of LP condition.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SystemLPConfig(u8 LowPowerMode, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_LP(LowPowerMode));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ SCB->SCR |= LowPowerMode;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SCB->SCR &= (u32)(~(u32)LowPowerMode);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SystemHandlerConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified System Handlers.
+* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler to be enabled
+* or disabled.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage
+* - SystemHandler_BusFault
+* - SystemHandler_UsageFault
+* - NewState: new state of specified System Handlers.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SystemHandlerConfig(u32 SystemHandler, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CONFIG_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ tmpreg = (u32)0x01 << (SystemHandler & (u32)0x1F);
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ SCB->SHCSR |= tmpreg;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SCB->SHCSR &= ~tmpreg;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SystemHandlerPriorityConfig
+* Description : Configures the specified System Handlers priority.
+* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler to be
+* enabled or disabled.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage
+* - SystemHandler_BusFault
+* - SystemHandler_UsageFault
+* - SystemHandler_SVCall
+* - SystemHandler_DebugMonitor
+* - SystemHandler_PSV
+* - SystemHandler_SysTick
+* - SystemHandlerPreemptionPriority: new priority group of the
+* specified system handlers.
+* - SystemHandlerSubPriority: new sub priority of the specified
+* system handlers.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SystemHandlerPriorityConfig(u32 SystemHandler, u8 SystemHandlerPreemptionPriority,
+ u8 SystemHandlerSubPriority)
+{
+ u32 tmp1 = 0x00, tmp2 = 0xFF, handlermask = 0x00;
+ u32 tmppriority = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PRIORITY_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler));
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_PREEMPTION_PRIORITY(SystemHandlerPreemptionPriority));
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_SUB_PRIORITY(SystemHandlerSubPriority));
+
+ tmppriority = (0x700 - (SCB->AIRCR & (u32)0x700))>> 0x08;
+ tmp1 = (0x4 - tmppriority);
+ tmp2 = tmp2 >> tmppriority;
+
+ tmppriority = (u32)SystemHandlerPreemptionPriority << tmp1;
+ tmppriority |= SystemHandlerSubPriority & tmp2;
+
+ tmppriority = tmppriority << 0x04;
+ tmp1 = SystemHandler & (u32)0xC0;
+ tmp1 = tmp1 >> 0x06;
+ tmp2 = (SystemHandler >> 0x08) & (u32)0x03;
+ tmppriority = tmppriority << (tmp2 * 0x08);
+ handlermask = (u32)0xFF << (tmp2 * 0x08);
+
+ SCB->SHPR[tmp1] &= ~handlermask;
+ SCB->SHPR[tmp1] |= tmppriority;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetSystemHandlerPendingBitStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified System handlers pending bit is
+* set or not.
+* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler pending bit to
+* check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage
+* - SystemHandler_BusFault
+* - SystemHandler_SVCall
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of System Handler pending bit(SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus NVIC_GetSystemHandlerPendingBitStatus(u32 SystemHandler)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u32 tmp = 0x00, tmppos = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GET_PENDING_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler));
+
+ tmppos = (SystemHandler >> 0x0A);
+ tmppos &= (u32)0x0F;
+
+ tmppos = (u32)0x01 << tmppos;
+
+ tmp = SCB->SHCSR & tmppos;
+
+ if (tmp == tmppos)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_SetSystemHandlerPendingBit
+* Description : Sets System Handler pending bit.
+* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler pending bit
+* to be set.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SystemHandler_NMI
+* - SystemHandler_PSV
+* - SystemHandler_SysTick
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_SetSystemHandlerPendingBit(u32 SystemHandler)
+{
+ u32 tmp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SET_PENDING_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler));
+
+ /* Get the System Handler pending bit position */
+ tmp = SystemHandler & (u32)0x1F;
+ /* Set the corresponding System Handler pending bit */
+ SCB->ICSR |= ((u32)0x01 << tmp);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_ClearSystemHandlerPendingBit
+* Description : Clears System Handler pending bit.
+* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler pending bit to
+* be clear.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SystemHandler_PSV
+* - SystemHandler_SysTick
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void NVIC_ClearSystemHandlerPendingBit(u32 SystemHandler)
+{
+ u32 tmp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CLEAR_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler));
+
+ /* Get the System Handler pending bit position */
+ tmp = SystemHandler & (u32)0x1F;
+ /* Clear the corresponding System Handler pending bit */
+ SCB->ICSR |= ((u32)0x01 << (tmp - 0x01));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetSystemHandlerActiveBitStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified System handlers active bit is
+* set or not.
+* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler active bit to
+* check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage
+* - SystemHandler_BusFault
+* - SystemHandler_UsageFault
+* - SystemHandler_SVCall
+* - SystemHandler_DebugMonitor
+* - SystemHandler_PSV
+* - SystemHandler_SysTick
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of System Handler active bit(SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus NVIC_GetSystemHandlerActiveBitStatus(u32 SystemHandler)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ u32 tmp = 0x00, tmppos = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GET_ACTIVE_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler));
+
+ tmppos = (SystemHandler >> 0x0E) & (u32)0x0F;
+
+ tmppos = (u32)0x01 << tmppos;
+
+ tmp = SCB->SHCSR & tmppos;
+
+ if (tmp == tmppos)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetFaultHandlerSources
+* Description : Returns the system fault handlers sources.
+* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler to get its fault
+* sources.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SystemHandler_HardFault
+* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage
+* - SystemHandler_BusFault
+* - SystemHandler_UsageFault
+* - SystemHandler_DebugMonitor
+* Output : None
+* Return : Source of the fault handler.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 NVIC_GetFaultHandlerSources(u32 SystemHandler)
+{
+ u32 faultsources = 0x00;
+ u32 tmpreg = 0x00, tmppos = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FAULT_SOURCE_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler));
+
+ tmpreg = (SystemHandler >> 0x12) & (u32)0x03;
+ tmppos = (SystemHandler >> 0x14) & (u32)0x03;
+
+ if (tmpreg == 0x00)
+ {
+ faultsources = SCB->HFSR;
+ }
+ else if (tmpreg == 0x01)
+ {
+ faultsources = SCB->CFSR >> (tmppos * 0x08);
+ if (tmppos != 0x02)
+ {
+ faultsources &= (u32)0x0F;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ faultsources &= (u32)0xFF;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ faultsources = SCB->DFSR;
+ }
+ return faultsources;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : NVIC_GetFaultAddress
+* Description : Returns the address of the location that generated a fault
+* handler.
+* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler to get its
+* fault address.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage
+* - SystemHandler_BusFault
+* Output : None
+* Return : Fault address.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 NVIC_GetFaultAddress(u32 SystemHandler)
+{
+ u32 faultaddress = 0x00;
+ u32 tmp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FAULT_ADDRESS_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler));
+
+ tmp = (SystemHandler >> 0x16) & (u32)0x01;
+
+ if (tmp == 0x00)
+ {
+ faultaddress = SCB->MMFAR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ faultaddress = SCB->BFAR;
+ }
+ return faultaddress;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_pwr.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_pwr.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e02594a --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_pwr.c @@ -0,0 +1,280 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_pwr.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the PWR firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_pwr.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* --------- PWR registers bit address in the alias region ---------- */
+#define PWR_OFFSET (PWR_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
+
+/* --- CR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of DBP bit */
+#define CR_OFFSET (PWR_OFFSET + 0x00)
+#define DBP_BitNumber 0x08
+#define CR_DBP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (DBP_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of PVDE bit */
+#define PVDE_BitNumber 0x04
+#define CR_PVDE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (PVDE_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* --- CSR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of EWUP bit */
+#define CSR_OFFSET (PWR_OFFSET + 0x04)
+#define EWUP_BitNumber 0x08
+#define CSR_EWUP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (EWUP_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* ------------------ PWR registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+/* CR register bit mask */
+#define CR_PDDS_Set ((u32)0x00000002)
+#define CR_DS_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFFFC)
+#define CR_CWUF_Set ((u32)0x00000004)
+#define CR_PLS_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFF1F)
+
+/* --------- Cortex System Control register bit mask ---------------- */
+/* Cortex System Control register address */
+#define SCB_SysCtrl ((u32)0xE000ED10)
+/* SLEEPDEEP bit mask */
+#define SysCtrl_SLEEPDEEP_Set ((u32)0x00000004)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the PWR peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void PWR_DeInit(void)
+{
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_BackupAccessCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables access to the RTC and backup registers.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the access to the RTC and backup
+* registers. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void PWR_BackupAccessCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CR_DBP_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_PVDCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the PVD.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void PWR_PVDCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CR_PVDE_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_PVDLevelConfig
+* Description : Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage
+* Detector(PVD).
+* Input : - PWR_PVDLevel: specifies the PVD detection level
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V2: PVD detection level set to 2.2V
+* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V3: PVD detection level set to 2.3V
+* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V4: PVD detection level set to 2.4V
+* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V5: PVD detection level set to 2.5V
+* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V6: PVD detection level set to 2.6V
+* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V7: PVD detection level set to 2.7V
+* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V8: PVD detection level set to 2.8V
+* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V9: PVD detection level set to 2.9V
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void PWR_PVDLevelConfig(u32 PWR_PVDLevel)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_LEVEL(PWR_PVDLevel));
+
+ tmpreg = PWR->CR;
+
+ /* Clear PLS[7:5] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR_PLS_Mask;
+
+ /* Set PLS[7:5] bits according to PWR_PVDLevel value */
+ tmpreg |= PWR_PVDLevel;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ PWR->CR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_WakeUpPinCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the WakeUp Pin functionality.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the WakeUp Pin functionality.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void PWR_WakeUpPinCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CSR_EWUP_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_EnterSTOPMode
+* Description : Enters STOP mode.
+* Input : - PWR_Regulator: specifies the regulator state in STOP mode.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - PWR_Regulator_ON: STOP mode with regulator ON
+* - PWR_Regulator_LowPower: STOP mode with
+* regulator in low power mode
+* - PWR_STOPEntry: specifies if STOP mode in entered with WFI or
+* WFE instruction.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - PWR_STOPEntry_WFI: enter STOP mode with WFI instruction
+* - PWR_STOPEntry_WFE: enter STOP mode with WFE instruction
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void PWR_EnterSTOPMode(u32 PWR_Regulator, u8 PWR_STOPEntry)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(PWR_Regulator));
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_STOP_ENTRY(PWR_STOPEntry));
+
+ /* Select the regulator state in STOP mode ---------------------------------*/
+ tmpreg = PWR->CR;
+
+ /* Clear PDDS and LPDS bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR_DS_Mask;
+
+ /* Set LPDS bit according to PWR_Regulator value */
+ tmpreg |= PWR_Regulator;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ PWR->CR = tmpreg;
+
+ /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ *(vu32 *) SCB_SysCtrl |= SysCtrl_SLEEPDEEP_Set;
+
+ /* Select STOP mode entry --------------------------------------------------*/
+ if(PWR_STOPEntry == PWR_STOPEntry_WFI)
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+ __WFI();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Event */
+ __WFE();
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode
+* Description : Enters STANDBY mode.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode(void)
+{
+ /* Clear Wake-up flag */
+ PWR->CR |= CR_CWUF_Set;
+
+ /* Select STANDBY mode */
+ PWR->CR |= CR_PDDS_Set;
+
+ /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ *(vu32 *) SCB_SysCtrl |= SysCtrl_SLEEPDEEP_Set;
+
+ /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+ __WFI();
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified PWR flag is set or not.
+* Input : - PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag
+* - PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag
+* - PWR_FLAG_PVDO: PVD Output
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of PWR_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus PWR_GetFlagStatus(u32 PWR_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_GET_FLAG(PWR_FLAG));
+
+ if ((PWR->CSR & PWR_FLAG) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the flag status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : PWR_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the PWR's pending flags.
+* Input : - PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag
+* - PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void PWR_ClearFlag(u32 PWR_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_CLEAR_FLAG(PWR_FLAG));
+
+ PWR->CR |= PWR_FLAG << 2;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rcc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rcc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0ab6387 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rcc.c @@ -0,0 +1,1104 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_rcc.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the RCC firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ------------ RCC registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */
+#define RCC_OFFSET (RCC_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
+
+/* --- CR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of HSION bit */
+#define CR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x00)
+#define HSION_BitNumber 0x00
+#define CR_HSION_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (HSION_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of PLLON bit */
+#define PLLON_BitNumber 0x18
+#define CR_PLLON_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (PLLON_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of CSSON bit */
+#define CSSON_BitNumber 0x13
+#define CR_CSSON_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (CSSON_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* --- CFGR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of USBPRE bit */
+#define CFGR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x04)
+#define USBPRE_BitNumber 0x16
+#define CFGR_USBPRE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFGR_OFFSET * 32) + (USBPRE_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* --- BDCR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of RTCEN bit */
+#define BDCR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x20)
+#define RTCEN_BitNumber 0x0F
+#define BDCR_RTCEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (BDCR_OFFSET * 32) + (RTCEN_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of BDRST bit */
+#define BDRST_BitNumber 0x10
+#define BDCR_BDRST_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (BDCR_OFFSET * 32) + (BDRST_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* --- CSR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of LSION bit */
+#define CSR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x24)
+#define LSION_BitNumber 0x00
+#define CSR_LSION_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (LSION_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* ---------------------- RCC registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+/* CR register bit mask */
+#define CR_HSEBYP_Reset ((u32)0xFFFBFFFF)
+#define CR_HSEBYP_Set ((u32)0x00040000)
+#define CR_HSEON_Reset ((u32)0xFFFEFFFF)
+#define CR_HSEON_Set ((u32)0x00010000)
+#define CR_HSITRIM_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFF07)
+
+/* CFGR register bit mask */
+#define CFGR_PLL_Mask ((u32)0xFFC0FFFF)
+#define CFGR_PLLMull_Mask ((u32)0x003C0000)
+#define CFGR_PLLSRC_Mask ((u32)0x00010000)
+#define CFGR_PLLXTPRE_Mask ((u32)0x00020000)
+#define CFGR_SWS_Mask ((u32)0x0000000C)
+#define CFGR_SW_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFFFC)
+#define CFGR_HPRE_Reset_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFF0F)
+#define CFGR_HPRE_Set_Mask ((u32)0x000000F0)
+#define CFGR_PPRE1_Reset_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFF8FF)
+#define CFGR_PPRE1_Set_Mask ((u32)0x00000700)
+#define CFGR_PPRE2_Reset_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFC7FF)
+#define CFGR_PPRE2_Set_Mask ((u32)0x00003800)
+#define CFGR_ADCPRE_Reset_Mask ((u32)0xFFFF3FFF)
+#define CFGR_ADCPRE_Set_Mask ((u32)0x0000C000)
+
+/* CSR register bit mask */
+#define CSR_RMVF_Set ((u32)0x01000000)
+
+/* RCC Flag Mask */
+#define FLAG_Mask ((u8)0x1F)
+
+/* Typical Value of the HSI in Hz */
+#define HSI_Value ((u32)8000000)
+
+/* CIR register byte 2 (Bits[15:8]) base address */
+#define CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS ((u32)0x40021009)
+/* CIR register byte 3 (Bits[23:16]) base address */
+#define CIR_BYTE3_ADDRESS ((u32)0x4002100A)
+
+/* CFGR register byte 4 (Bits[31:24]) base address */
+#define CFGR_BYTE4_ADDRESS ((u32)0x40021007)
+
+/* BDCR register base address */
+#define BDCR_ADDRESS (PERIPH_BASE + BDCR_OFFSET)
+
+/* Time out for HSE start up */
+#define HSEStartUp_TimeOut ((u16)0x01FF)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+static uc8 APBAHBPrescTable[16] = {0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9};
+static uc8 ADCPrescTable[4] = {2, 4, 6, 8};
+
+static volatile FlagStatus HSEStatus;
+static vu32 StartUpCounter = 0;
+
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_DeInit
+* Description : Resets the RCC clock configuration to the default reset state.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_DeInit(void)
+{
+ /* Set HSION bit */
+ RCC->CR |= (u32)0x00000001;
+
+ /* Reset SW[1:0], HPRE[3:0], PPRE1[2:0], PPRE2[2:0], ADCPRE[1:0] and MCO[2:0] bits */
+ RCC->CFGR &= (u32)0xF8FF0000;
+
+ /* Reset HSEON, CSSON and PLLON bits */
+ RCC->CR &= (u32)0xFEF6FFFF;
+
+ /* Reset HSEBYP bit */
+ RCC->CR &= (u32)0xFFFBFFFF;
+
+ /* Reset PLLSRC, PLLXTPRE, PLLMUL[3:0] and USBPRE bits */
+ RCC->CFGR &= (u32)0xFF80FFFF;
+
+ /* Disable all interrupts */
+ RCC->CIR = 0x00000000;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_HSEConfig
+* Description : Configures the External High Speed oscillator (HSE).
+* HSE can not be stopped if it is used directly or through the
+* PLL as system clock.
+* Input : - RCC_HSE: specifies the new state of the HSE.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_HSE_OFF: HSE oscillator OFF
+* - RCC_HSE_ON: HSE oscillator ON
+* - RCC_HSE_Bypass: HSE oscillator bypassed with external
+* clock
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_HSEConfig(u32 RCC_HSE)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE(RCC_HSE));
+
+ /* Reset HSEON and HSEBYP bits before configuring the HSE ------------------*/
+ /* Reset HSEON bit */
+ RCC->CR &= CR_HSEON_Reset;
+
+ /* Reset HSEBYP bit */
+ RCC->CR &= CR_HSEBYP_Reset;
+
+ /* Configure HSE (RCC_HSE_OFF is already covered by the code section above) */
+ switch(RCC_HSE)
+ {
+ case RCC_HSE_ON:
+ /* Set HSEON bit */
+ RCC->CR |= CR_HSEON_Set;
+ break;
+
+ case RCC_HSE_Bypass:
+ /* Set HSEBYP and HSEON bits */
+ RCC->CR |= CR_HSEBYP_Set | CR_HSEON_Set;
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp
+* Description : Waits for HSE start-up.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : An ErrorStatus enumuration value:
+* - SUCCESS: HSE oscillator is stable and ready to use
+* - ERROR: HSE oscillator not yet ready
+*******************************************************************************/
+ErrorStatus RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp(void)
+{
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Wait till HSE is ready and if Time out is reached exit */
+ do
+ {
+ HSEStatus = RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY);
+ StartUpCounter++;
+ } while((HSEStatus == RESET) && (StartUpCounter != HSEStartUp_TimeOut));
+
+
+ if (RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) != RESET)
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+
+ return (status);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue
+* Description : Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration
+* value.
+* Input : - HSICalibrationValue: specifies the calibration trimming value.
+* This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x1F.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue(u8 HSICalibrationValue)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_CALIBRATION_VALUE(HSICalibrationValue));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CR;
+
+ /* Clear HSITRIM[4:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR_HSITRIM_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the HSITRIM[4:0] bits according to HSICalibrationValue value */
+ tmpreg |= (u32)HSICalibrationValue << 3;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_HSICmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI).
+* HSI can not be stopped if it is used directly or through the
+* PLL as system clock.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the HSI.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_HSICmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CR_HSION_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_PLLConfig
+* Description : Configures the PLL clock source and multiplication factor.
+* This function must be used only when the PLL is disabled.
+* Input : - RCC_PLLSource: specifies the PLL entry clock source.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_PLLSource_HSI_Div2: HSI oscillator clock divided
+* by 2 selected as PLL clock entry
+* - RCC_PLLSource_HSE_Div1: HSE oscillator clock selected
+* as PLL clock entry
+* - RCC_PLLSource_HSE_Div2: HSE oscillator clock divided
+* by 2 selected as PLL clock entry
+* - RCC_PLLMul: specifies the PLL multiplication factor.
+* This parameter can be RCC_PLLMul_x where x:[2,16]
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_PLLConfig(u32 RCC_PLLSource, u32 RCC_PLLMul)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_SOURCE(RCC_PLLSource));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_MUL(RCC_PLLMul));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear PLLSRC, PLLXTPRE and PLLMUL[3:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CFGR_PLL_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the PLL configuration bits */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_PLLSource | RCC_PLLMul;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_PLLCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the PLL.
+* The PLL can not be disabled if it is used as system clock.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the PLL.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_PLLCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CR_PLLON_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_SYSCLKConfig
+* Description : Configures the system clock (SYSCLK).
+* Input : - RCC_SYSCLKSource: specifies the clock source used as system
+* clock. This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSI: HSI selected as system clock
+* - RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSE: HSE selected as system clock
+* - RCC_SYSCLKSource_PLLCLK: PLL selected as system clock
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_SYSCLKConfig(u32 RCC_SYSCLKSource)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_SYSCLK_SOURCE(RCC_SYSCLKSource));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear SW[1:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CFGR_SW_Mask;
+
+ /* Set SW[1:0] bits according to RCC_SYSCLKSource value */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_SYSCLKSource;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_GetSYSCLKSource
+* Description : Returns the clock source used as system clock.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : The clock source used as system clock. The returned value can
+* be one of the following:
+* - 0x00: HSI used as system clock
+* - 0x04: HSE used as system clock
+* - 0x08: PLL used as system clock
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 RCC_GetSYSCLKSource(void)
+{
+ return ((u8)(RCC->CFGR & CFGR_SWS_Mask));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_HCLKConfig
+* Description : Configures the AHB clock (HCLK).
+* Input : - RCC_SYSCLK: defines the AHB clock divider. This clock is
+* derived from the system clock (SYSCLK).
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div1: AHB clock = SYSCLK
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div2: AHB clock = SYSCLK/2
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div4: AHB clock = SYSCLK/4
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div8: AHB clock = SYSCLK/8
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div16: AHB clock = SYSCLK/16
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div64: AHB clock = SYSCLK/64
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div128: AHB clock = SYSCLK/128
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div256: AHB clock = SYSCLK/256
+* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div512: AHB clock = SYSCLK/512
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_HCLKConfig(u32 RCC_SYSCLK)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HCLK(RCC_SYSCLK));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear HPRE[3:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CFGR_HPRE_Reset_Mask;
+
+ /* Set HPRE[3:0] bits according to RCC_SYSCLK value */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_SYSCLK;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_PCLK1Config
+* Description : Configures the Low Speed APB clock (PCLK1).
+* Input : - RCC_HCLK: defines the APB1 clock divider. This clock is
+* derived from the AHB clock (HCLK).
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div1: APB1 clock = HCLK
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div2: APB1 clock = HCLK/2
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div4: APB1 clock = HCLK/4
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div8: APB1 clock = HCLK/8
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div16: APB1 clock = HCLK/16
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_PCLK1Config(u32 RCC_HCLK)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_HCLK));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear PPRE1[2:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CFGR_PPRE1_Reset_Mask;
+
+ /* Set PPRE1[2:0] bits according to RCC_HCLK value */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_HCLK;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_PCLK2Config
+* Description : Configures the High Speed APB clock (PCLK2).
+* Input : - RCC_HCLK: defines the APB2 clock divider. This clock is
+* derived from the AHB clock (HCLK).
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div1: APB2 clock = HCLK
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div2: APB2 clock = HCLK/2
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div4: APB2 clock = HCLK/4
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div8: APB2 clock = HCLK/8
+* - RCC_HCLK_Div16: APB2 clock = HCLK/16
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_PCLK2Config(u32 RCC_HCLK)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_HCLK));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear PPRE2[2:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CFGR_PPRE2_Reset_Mask;
+
+ /* Set PPRE2[2:0] bits according to RCC_HCLK value */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_HCLK << 3;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified RCC interrupts.
+* Input : - RCC_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt sources to be enabled
+* or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt
+* - NewState: new state of the specified RCC interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_ITConfig(u8 RCC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_IT(RCC_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[12:8] bits to enable the selected interrupts */
+ *(vu8 *) CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS |= RCC_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[12:8] bits to disable the selected interrupts */
+ *(vu8 *) CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS &= (u8)~RCC_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_USBCLKConfig
+* Description : Configures the USB clock (USBCLK).
+* Input : - RCC_USBCLKSource: specifies the USB clock source. This clock
+* is derived from the PLL output.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_1Div5: PLL clock divided by 1,5
+* selected as USB clock source
+* - RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_Div1: PLL clock selected as USB
+* clock source
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_USBCLKConfig(u32 RCC_USBCLKSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_USBCLK_SOURCE(RCC_USBCLKSource));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CFGR_USBPRE_BB = RCC_USBCLKSource;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_ADCCLKConfig
+* Description : Configures the ADC clock (ADCCLK).
+* Input : - RCC_PCLK2: defines the ADC clock divider. This clock is
+* derived from the APB2 clock (PCLK2).
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_PCLK2_Div2: ADC clock = PCLK2/2
+* - RCC_PCLK2_Div4: ADC clock = PCLK2/4
+* - RCC_PCLK2_Div6: ADC clock = PCLK2/6
+* - RCC_PCLK2_Div8: ADC clock = PCLK2/8
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_ADCCLKConfig(u32 RCC_PCLK2)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_ADCCLK(RCC_PCLK2));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear ADCPRE[1:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CFGR_ADCPRE_Reset_Mask;
+
+ /* Set ADCPRE[1:0] bits according to RCC_PCLK2 value */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_PCLK2;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_LSEConfig
+* Description : Configures the External Low Speed oscillator (LSE).
+* Input : - RCC_LSE: specifies the new state of the LSE.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_LSE_OFF: LSE oscillator OFF
+* - RCC_LSE_ON: LSE oscillator ON
+* - RCC_LSE_Bypass: LSE oscillator bypassed with external
+* clock
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_LSEConfig(u8 RCC_LSE)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_LSE(RCC_LSE));
+
+ /* Reset LSEON and LSEBYP bits before configuring the LSE ------------------*/
+ /* Reset LSEON bit */
+ *(vu8 *) BDCR_ADDRESS = RCC_LSE_OFF;
+
+ /* Reset LSEBYP bit */
+ *(vu8 *) BDCR_ADDRESS = RCC_LSE_OFF;
+
+ /* Configure LSE (RCC_LSE_OFF is already covered by the code section above) */
+ switch(RCC_LSE)
+ {
+ case RCC_LSE_ON:
+ /* Set LSEON bit */
+ *(vu8 *) BDCR_ADDRESS = RCC_LSE_ON;
+ break;
+
+ case RCC_LSE_Bypass:
+ /* Set LSEBYP and LSEON bits */
+ *(vu8 *) BDCR_ADDRESS = RCC_LSE_Bypass | RCC_LSE_ON;
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_LSICmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI).
+* LSI can not be disabled if the IWDG is running.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the LSI.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_LSICmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CSR_LSION_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_RTCCLKConfig
+* Description : Configures the RTC clock (RTCCLK).
+* Once the RTC clock is selected it can’t be changed unless the
+* Backup domain is reset.
+* Input : - RCC_RTCCLKSource: specifies the RTC clock source.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSE: LSE selected as RTC clock
+* - RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSI: LSI selected as RTC clock
+* - RCC_RTCCLKSource_HSE_Div128: HSE clock divided by 128
+* selected as RTC clock
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_RTCCLKConfig(u32 RCC_RTCCLKSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_RTCCLK_SOURCE(RCC_RTCCLKSource));
+
+ /* Select the RTC clock source */
+ RCC->BDCR |= RCC_RTCCLKSource;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_RTCCLKCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the RTC clock.
+* This function must be used only after the RTC clock was
+* selected using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig function.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the RTC clock.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_RTCCLKCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) BDCR_RTCEN_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_GetClocksFreq
+* Description : Returns the frequencies of different on chip clocks.
+* Input : - RCC_Clocks: pointer to a RCC_ClocksTypeDef structure which
+* will hold the clocks frequencies.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_GetClocksFreq(RCC_ClocksTypeDef* RCC_Clocks)
+{
+ u32 tmp = 0, pllmull = 0, pllsource = 0, presc = 0;
+
+ /* Get SYSCLK source -------------------------------------------------------*/
+ tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_SWS_Mask;
+
+ switch (tmp)
+ {
+ case 0x00: /* HSI used as system clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI_Value;
+ break;
+
+ case 0x04: /* HSE used as system clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSE_Value;
+ break;
+
+ case 0x08: /* PLL used as system clock */
+ /* Get PLL clock source and multiplication factor ----------------------*/
+ pllmull = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PLLMull_Mask;
+ pllmull = ( pllmull >> 18) + 2;
+
+ pllsource = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PLLSRC_Mask;
+
+ if (pllsource == 0x00)
+ {/* HSI oscillator clock divided by 2 selected as PLL clock entry */
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = (HSI_Value >> 1) * pllmull;
+ }
+ else
+ {/* HSE selected as PLL clock entry */
+
+ if ((RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PLLXTPRE_Mask) != (u32)RESET)
+ {/* HSE oscillator clock divided by 2 */
+
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = (HSE_Value >> 1) * pllmull;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSE_Value * pllmull;
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI_Value;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Compute HCLK, PCLK1, PCLK2 and ADCCLK clocks frequencies ----------------*/
+ /* Get HCLK prescaler */
+ tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_HPRE_Set_Mask;
+ tmp = tmp >> 4;
+ presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp];
+
+ /* HCLK clock frequency */
+ RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency >> presc;
+
+ /* Get PCLK1 prescaler */
+ tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PPRE1_Set_Mask;
+ tmp = tmp >> 8;
+ presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp];
+
+ /* PCLK1 clock frequency */
+ RCC_Clocks->PCLK1_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency >> presc;
+
+ /* Get PCLK2 prescaler */
+ tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PPRE2_Set_Mask;
+ tmp = tmp >> 11;
+ presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp];
+
+ /* PCLK2 clock frequency */
+ RCC_Clocks->PCLK2_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency >> presc;
+
+ /* Get ADCCLK prescaler */
+ tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_ADCPRE_Set_Mask;
+ tmp = tmp >> 14;
+ presc = ADCPrescTable[tmp];
+
+ /* ADCCLK clock frequency */
+ RCC_Clocks->ADCCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK2_Frequency / presc;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the AHB peripheral clock.
+* Input : - RCC_AHBPeriph: specifies the AHB peripheral to gates its clock.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA1
+* - RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA2
+* - RCC_AHBPeriph_SRAM
+* - RCC_AHBPeriph_FLITF
+* - RCC_AHBPeriph_CRC
+* - RCC_AHBPeriph_FSMC
+* - RCC_AHBPeriph_SDIO
+* SRAM and FLITF clock can be disabled only during sleep mode.
+* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(u32 RCC_AHBPeriph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_AHB_PERIPH(RCC_AHBPeriph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->AHBENR |= RCC_AHBPeriph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->AHBENR &= ~RCC_AHBPeriph;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral clock.
+* Input : - RCC_APB2Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral to gates its
+* clock.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RCC_APB2Periph_AFIO, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOA, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOB,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOC, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOD, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOE,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOF, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOG, RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_ADC2, RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8, RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_ALL
+* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(u32 RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(RCC_APB2Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->APB2ENR |= RCC_APB2Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->APB2ENR &= ~RCC_APB2Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral clock.
+* Input : - RCC_APB1Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral to gates its
+* clock.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_TIM5, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, RCC_APB1Periph_USART4,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_USART5, RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_USB, RCC_APB1Periph_CAN, RCC_APB1Periph_BKP,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, RCC_APB1Periph_ALL
+* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(u32 RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(RCC_APB1Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->APB1ENR |= RCC_APB1Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->APB1ENR &= ~RCC_APB1Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd
+* Description : Forces or releases High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral reset.
+* Input : - RCC_APB2Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral to reset.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RCC_APB2Periph_AFIO, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOA, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOB,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOC, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOD, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOE,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOF, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOG, RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_ADC2, RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8, RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3,
+* RCC_APB2Periph_ALL
+* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(u32 RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(RCC_APB2Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->APB2RSTR |= RCC_APB2Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->APB2RSTR &= ~RCC_APB2Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd
+* Description : Forces or releases Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral reset.
+* Input : - RCC_APB1Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral to reset.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_TIM5, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, RCC_APB1Periph_USART4,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_USART5, RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_USB, RCC_APB1Periph_CAN, RCC_APB1Periph_BKP,
+* RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, RCC_APB1Periph_ALL
+* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(u32 RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(RCC_APB1Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->APB1RSTR |= RCC_APB1Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->APB1RSTR &= ~RCC_APB1Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_BackupResetCmd
+* Description : Forces or releases the Backup domain reset.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the Backup domain reset.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_BackupResetCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) BDCR_BDRST_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the Clock Security System.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the Clock Security System..
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CR_CSSON_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_MCOConfig
+* Description : Selects the clock source to output on MCO pin.
+* Input : - RCC_MCO: specifies the clock source to output.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_MCO_NoClock: No clock selected
+* - RCC_MCO_SYSCLK: System clock selected
+* - RCC_MCO_HSI: HSI oscillator clock selected
+* - RCC_MCO_HSE: HSE oscillator clock selected
+* - RCC_MCO_PLLCLK_Div2: PLL clock divided by 2 selected
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_MCOConfig(u8 RCC_MCO)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO(RCC_MCO));
+
+ /* Perform Byte access to MCO[2:0] bits to select the MCO source */
+ *(vu8 *) CFGR_BYTE4_ADDRESS = RCC_MCO;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified RCC flag is set or not.
+* Input : - RCC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY: HSI oscillator clock ready
+* - RCC_FLAG_HSERDY: HSE oscillator clock ready
+* - RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY: PLL clock ready
+* - RCC_FLAG_LSERDY: LSE oscillator clock ready
+* - RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY: LSI oscillator clock ready
+* - RCC_FLAG_PINRST: Pin reset
+* - RCC_FLAG_PORRST: POR/PDR reset
+* - RCC_FLAG_SFTRST: Software reset
+* - RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST: Independent Watchdog reset
+* - RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST: Window Watchdog reset
+* - RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST: Low Power reset
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of RCC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus RCC_GetFlagStatus(u8 RCC_FLAG)
+{
+ u32 tmp = 0;
+ u32 statusreg = 0;
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_FLAG(RCC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Get the RCC register index */
+ tmp = RCC_FLAG >> 5;
+
+ if (tmp == 1) /* The flag to check is in CR register */
+ {
+ statusreg = RCC->CR;
+ }
+ else if (tmp == 2) /* The flag to check is in BDCR register */
+ {
+ statusreg = RCC->BDCR;
+ }
+ else /* The flag to check is in CSR register */
+ {
+ statusreg = RCC->CSR;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the flag position */
+ tmp = RCC_FLAG & FLAG_Mask;
+
+ if ((statusreg & ((u32)1 << tmp)) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the flag status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the RCC reset flags.
+* The reset flags are: RCC_FLAG_PINRST, RCC_FLAG_PORRST,
+* RCC_FLAG_SFTRST, RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST, RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST,
+* RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_ClearFlag(void)
+{
+ /* Set RMVF bit to clear the reset flags */
+ RCC->CSR |= CSR_RMVF_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified RCC interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : - RCC_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of RCC_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus RCC_GetITStatus(u8 RCC_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_GET_IT(RCC_IT));
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified RCC interrupt */
+ if ((RCC->CIR & RCC_IT) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the RCC_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RCC_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the RCC’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : - RCC_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt
+* - RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RCC_ClearITPendingBit(u8 RCC_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_CLEAR_IT(RCC_IT));
+
+ /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[23:16] bits to clear the selected interrupt
+ pending bits */
+ *(vu8 *) CIR_BYTE3_ADDRESS = RCC_IT;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rtc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rtc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55a8bea --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rtc.c @@ -0,0 +1,320 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_rtc.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the RTC firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_rtc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define CRL_CNF_Set ((u16)0x0010) /* Configuration Flag Enable Mask */
+#define CRL_CNF_Reset ((u16)0xFFEF) /* Configuration Flag Disable Mask */
+#define RTC_LSB_Mask ((u32)0x0000FFFF) /* RTC LSB Mask */
+#define PRLH_MSB_Mask ((u32)0x000F0000) /* RTC Prescaler MSB Mask */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified RTC interrupts.
+* Input : - RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupts sources to be enabled
+* or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RTC_IT_OW: Overflow interrupt
+* - RTC_IT_ALR: Alarm interrupt
+* - RTC_IT_SEC: Second interrupt
+* - NewState: new state of the specified RTC interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_ITConfig(u16 RTC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_IT(RTC_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RTC->CRH |= RTC_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RTC->CRH &= (u16)~RTC_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_EnterConfigMode
+* Description : Enters the RTC configuration mode.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_EnterConfigMode(void)
+{
+ /* Set the CNF flag to enter in the Configuration Mode */
+ RTC->CRL |= CRL_CNF_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_ExitConfigMode
+* Description : Exits from the RTC configuration mode.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_ExitConfigMode(void)
+{
+ /* Reset the CNF flag to exit from the Configuration Mode */
+ RTC->CRL &= CRL_CNF_Reset;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_GetCounter
+* Description : Gets the RTC counter value.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : RTC counter value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 RTC_GetCounter(void)
+{
+ u16 tmp = 0;
+ tmp = RTC->CNTL;
+
+ return (((u32)RTC->CNTH << 16 ) | tmp) ;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_SetCounter
+* Description : Sets the RTC counter value.
+* Input : - CounterValue: RTC counter new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_SetCounter(u32 CounterValue)
+{
+ RTC_EnterConfigMode();
+
+ /* Set RTC COUNTER MSB word */
+ RTC->CNTH = CounterValue >> 16;
+ /* Set RTC COUNTER LSB word */
+ RTC->CNTL = (CounterValue & RTC_LSB_Mask);
+
+ RTC_ExitConfigMode();
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_SetPrescaler
+* Description : Sets the RTC prescaler value.
+* Input : - PrescalerValue: RTC prescaler new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_SetPrescaler(u32 PrescalerValue)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_PRESCALER(PrescalerValue));
+
+ RTC_EnterConfigMode();
+
+ /* Set RTC PRESCALER MSB word */
+ RTC->PRLH = (PrescalerValue & PRLH_MSB_Mask) >> 16;
+ /* Set RTC PRESCALER LSB word */
+ RTC->PRLL = (PrescalerValue & RTC_LSB_Mask);
+
+ RTC_ExitConfigMode();
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_SetAlarm
+* Description : Sets the RTC alarm value.
+* Input : - AlarmValue: RTC alarm new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_SetAlarm(u32 AlarmValue)
+{
+ RTC_EnterConfigMode();
+
+ /* Set the ALARM MSB word */
+ RTC->ALRH = AlarmValue >> 16;
+ /* Set the ALARM LSB word */
+ RTC->ALRL = (AlarmValue & RTC_LSB_Mask);
+
+ RTC_ExitConfigMode();
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_GetDivider
+* Description : Gets the RTC divider value.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : RTC Divider value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 RTC_GetDivider(void)
+{
+ u32 tmp = 0x00;
+
+ tmp = ((u32)RTC->DIVH & (u32)0x000F) << 16;
+ tmp |= RTC->DIVL;
+
+ return tmp;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_WaitForLastTask
+* Description : Waits until last write operation on RTC registers has finished.
+* This function must be called before any write to RTC registers.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_WaitForLastTask(void)
+{
+ /* Loop until RTOFF flag is set */
+ while ((RTC->CRL & RTC_FLAG_RTOFF) == (u16)RESET)
+ {
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_WaitForSynchro
+* Description : Waits until the RTC registers (RTC_CNT, RTC_ALR and RTC_PRL)
+* are synchronized with RTC APB clock.
+* This function must be called before any read operation after
+* an APB reset or an APB clock stop.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_WaitForSynchro(void)
+{
+ /* Clear RSF flag */
+ RTC->CRL &= (u16)~RTC_FLAG_RSF;
+
+ /* Loop until RSF flag is set */
+ while ((RTC->CRL & RTC_FLAG_RSF) == (u16)RESET)
+ {
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified RTC flag is set or not.
+* Input : - RTC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one the following values:
+* - RTC_FLAG_RTOFF: RTC Operation OFF flag
+* - RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag
+* - RTC_FLAG_OW: Overflow flag
+* - RTC_FLAG_ALR: Alarm flag
+* - RTC_FLAG_SEC: Second flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of RTC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus RTC_GetFlagStatus(u16 RTC_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_GET_FLAG(RTC_FLAG));
+
+ if ((RTC->CRL & RTC_FLAG) != (u16)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the RTC’s pending flags.
+* Input : - RTC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag. This flag
+* is cleared only after an APB reset or an APB Clock stop.
+* - RTC_FLAG_OW: Overflow flag
+* - RTC_FLAG_ALR: Alarm flag
+* - RTC_FLAG_SEC: Second flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_ClearFlag(u16 RTC_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_CLEAR_FLAG(RTC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the coressponding RTC flag */
+ RTC->CRL &= (u16)~RTC_FLAG;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified RTC interrupt has occured or not.
+* Input : - RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupts sources to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - RTC_IT_OW: Overflow interrupt
+* - RTC_IT_ALR: Alarm interrupt
+* - RTC_IT_SEC: Second interrupt
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of the RTC_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus RTC_GetITStatus(u16 RTC_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_GET_IT(RTC_IT));
+
+ bitstatus = (ITStatus)(RTC->CRL & RTC_IT);
+
+ if (((RTC->CRH & RTC_IT) != (u16)RESET) && (bitstatus != (u16)RESET))
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : RTC_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the RTC’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : - RTC_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - RTC_IT_OW: Overflow interrupt
+* - RTC_IT_ALR: Alarm interrupt
+* - RTC_IT_SEC: Second interrupt
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void RTC_ClearITPendingBit(u16 RTC_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_IT(RTC_IT));
+
+ /* Clear the coressponding RTC pending bit */
+ RTC->CRL &= (u16)~RTC_IT;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_sdio.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_sdio.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b7da816 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_sdio.c @@ -0,0 +1,832 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_sdio.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the SDIO firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_sdio.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ------------ SDIO registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */
+#define SDIO_OFFSET (SDIO_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
+
+/* --- CLKCR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of CLKEN bit */
+#define CLKCR_OFFSET (SDIO_OFFSET + 0x04)
+#define CLKEN_BitNumber 0x08
+#define CLKCR_CLKEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CLKCR_OFFSET * 32) + (CLKEN_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* --- CMD Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of SDIOSUSPEND bit */
+#define CMD_OFFSET (SDIO_OFFSET + 0x0C)
+#define SDIOSUSPEND_BitNumber 0x0B
+#define CMD_SDIOSUSPEND_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CMD_OFFSET * 32) + (SDIOSUSPEND_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of ENCMDCOMPL bit */
+#define ENCMDCOMPL_BitNumber 0x0C
+#define CMD_ENCMDCOMPL_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CMD_OFFSET * 32) + (ENCMDCOMPL_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of NIEN bit */
+#define NIEN_BitNumber 0x0D
+#define CMD_NIEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CMD_OFFSET * 32) + (NIEN_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of ATACMD bit */
+#define ATACMD_BitNumber 0x0E
+#define CMD_ATACMD_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CMD_OFFSET * 32) + (ATACMD_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* --- DCTRL Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of DMAEN bit */
+#define DCTRL_OFFSET (SDIO_OFFSET + 0x2C)
+#define DMAEN_BitNumber 0x03
+#define DCTRL_DMAEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (DMAEN_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of RWSTART bit */
+#define RWSTART_BitNumber 0x08
+#define DCTRL_RWSTART_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (RWSTART_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of RWSTOP bit */
+#define RWSTOP_BitNumber 0x09
+#define DCTRL_RWSTOP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (RWSTOP_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of RWMOD bit */
+#define RWMOD_BitNumber 0x0A
+#define DCTRL_RWMOD_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (RWMOD_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* Alias word address of SDIOEN bit */
+#define SDIOEN_BitNumber 0x0B
+#define DCTRL_SDIOEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (SDIOEN_BitNumber * 4))
+
+
+/* ---------------------- SDIO registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+/* --- CLKCR Register ---*/
+/* CLKCR register clear mask */
+#define CLKCR_CLEAR_MASK ((u32)0xFFFF8100)
+
+/* --- PWRCTRL Register ---*/
+/* SDIO PWRCTRL Mask */
+#define PWR_PWRCTRL_MASK ((u32)0xFFFFFFFC)
+
+/* --- DCTRL Register ---*/
+/* SDIO DCTRL Clear Mask */
+#define DCTRL_CLEAR_MASK ((u32)0xFFFFFF08)
+
+/* --- CMD Register ---*/
+/* CMD Register clear mask */
+#define CMD_CLEAR_MASK ((u32)0xFFFFF800)
+
+/* SDIO RESP Registers Address */
+#define SDIO_RESP_ADDR ((u32)(SDIO_BASE + 0x14))
+
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the SDIO peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_DeInit(void)
+{
+ SDIO->POWER = 0x00000000;
+ SDIO->CLKCR = 0x00000000;
+ SDIO->ARG = 0x00000000;
+ SDIO->CMD = 0x00000000;
+ SDIO->DTIMER = 0x00000000;
+ SDIO->DLEN = 0x00000000;
+ SDIO->DCTRL = 0x00000000;
+ SDIO->ICR = 0x00C007FF;
+ SDIO->MASK = 0x00000000;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_Init
+* Description : Initializes the SDIO peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the SDIO_InitStruct.
+* Input : SDIO_InitStruct : pointer to a SDIO_InitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the SDIO
+* peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_Init(SDIO_InitTypeDef* SDIO_InitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLOCK_EDGE(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockEdge));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLOCK_BYPASS(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockBypass));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLOCK_POWER_SAVE(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockPowerSave));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_BUS_WIDE(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_BusWide));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_HARDWARE_FLOW_CONTROL(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_HardwareFlowControl));
+
+/*---------------------------- SDIO CLKCR Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Get the SDIO CLKCR value */
+ tmpreg = SDIO->CLKCR;
+
+ /* Clear CLKDIV, PWRSAV, BYPASS, WIDBUS, NEGEDGE, HWFC_EN bits */
+ tmpreg &= CLKCR_CLEAR_MASK;
+
+ /* Set CLKDIV bits according to SDIO_ClockDiv value */
+ /* Set PWRSAV bit according to SDIO_ClockPowerSave value */
+ /* Set BYPASS bit according to SDIO_ClockBypass value */
+ /* Set WIDBUS bits according to SDIO_BusWide value */
+ /* Set NEGEDGE bits according to SDIO_ClockEdge value */
+ /* Set HWFC_EN bits according to SDIO_HardwareFlowControl value */
+ tmpreg |= (SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockDiv | SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockPowerSave |
+ SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockBypass | SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_BusWide |
+ SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockEdge | SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_HardwareFlowControl);
+
+ /* Write to SDIO CLKCR */
+ SDIO->CLKCR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each SDIO_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : SDIO_InitStruct: pointer to an SDIO_InitTypeDef structure which
+* will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_StructInit(SDIO_InitTypeDef* SDIO_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* SDIO_InitStruct members default value */
+ SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockDiv = 0x00;
+ SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockEdge = SDIO_ClockEdge_Rising;
+ SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockBypass = SDIO_ClockBypass_Disable;
+ SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockPowerSave = SDIO_ClockPowerSave_Disable;
+ SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_BusWide = SDIO_BusWide_1b;
+ SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_HardwareFlowControl = SDIO_HardwareFlowControl_Disable;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_ClockCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the SDIO Clock.
+* Input : NewState: new state of the SDIO Clock.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_ClockCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CLKCR_CLKEN_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_SetPowerState
+* Description : Sets the power status of the controller.
+* Input : SDIO_PowerState: new state of the Power state.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SDIO_PowerState_OFF
+* - SDIO_PowerState_ON
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_SetPowerState(u32 SDIO_PowerState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_POWER_STATE(SDIO_PowerState));
+
+ SDIO->POWER &= PWR_PWRCTRL_MASK;
+ SDIO->POWER |= SDIO_PowerState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_GetPowerState
+* Description : Gets the power status of the controller.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Power status of the controller. The returned value can
+* be one of the following:
+* - 0x00: Power OFF
+* - 0x02: Power UP
+* - 0x03: Power ON
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 SDIO_GetPowerState(void)
+{
+ return (SDIO->POWER & (~PWR_PWRCTRL_MASK));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the SDIO interrupts.
+* Input : - SDIO_IT: specifies the SDIO interrupt sources to be
+* enabled or disabled.
+* This parameter can be one or a combination of the following
+* values:
+* - SDIO_IT_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check
+* failed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* failed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DTIMEOUT: Data timeout interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check
+* passed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required)
+* interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is
+* zero) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data
+* signals in wide bus mode interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* passed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CMDACT: Command transfer in progress interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXACT: Data transmit in progress interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXACT: Data receive in progress interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOHE: Transmit FIFO Half Empty interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOHF: Receive FIFO Half Full interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOF: Transmit FIFO full interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOF: Receive FIFO full interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOE: Transmit FIFO empty interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOE: Receive FIFO empty interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXDAVL: Data available in transmit FIFO interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXDAVL: Data available in receive FIFO interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal
+* received for CMD61 interrupt
+* - NewState: new state of the specified SDIO interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_ITConfig(u32 SDIO_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_IT(SDIO_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the SDIO interrupts */
+ SDIO->MASK |= SDIO_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the SDIO interrupts */
+ SDIO->MASK &= ~SDIO_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_DMACmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the SDIO DMA request.
+* Input : NewState: new state of the selected SDIO DMA request.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_DMACmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) DCTRL_DMAEN_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_SendCommand
+* Description : Initializes the SDIO Command according to the specified
+* parameters in the SDIO_CmdInitStruct and send the command.
+* Input : SDIO_CmdInitStruct : pointer to a SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the configuration information
+* for the SDIO command.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_SendCommand(SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef *SDIO_CmdInitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_CMD_INDEX(SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CmdIndex));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_RESPONSE(SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Response));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_WAIT(SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Wait));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_CPSM(SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CPSM));
+
+/*---------------------------- SDIO ARG Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Set the SDIO Argument value */
+ SDIO->ARG = SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Argument;
+
+/*---------------------------- SDIO CMD Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Get the SDIO CMD value */
+ tmpreg = SDIO->CMD;
+
+ /* Clear CMDINDEX, WAITRESP, WAITINT, WAITPEND, CPSMEN bits */
+ tmpreg &= CMD_CLEAR_MASK;
+ /* Set CMDINDEX bits according to SDIO_CmdIndex value */
+ /* Set WAITRESP bits according to SDIO_Response value */
+ /* Set WAITINT and WAITPEND bits according to SDIO_Wait value */
+ /* Set CPSMEN bits according to SDIO_CPSM value */
+ tmpreg |= (u32)SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CmdIndex | SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Response
+ | SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Wait | SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CPSM;
+
+ /* Write to SDIO CMD */
+ SDIO->CMD = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_CmdStructInit
+* Description : Fills each SDIO_CmdInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : SDIO_CmdInitStruct: pointer to an SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef
+* structure which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_CmdStructInit(SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef* SDIO_CmdInitStruct)
+{
+ /* SDIO_CmdInitStruct members default value */
+ SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Argument = 0x00;
+ SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CmdIndex = 0x00;
+ SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Response = SDIO_Response_No;
+ SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Wait = SDIO_Wait_No;
+ SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CPSM = SDIO_CPSM_Disable;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_GetCommandResponse
+* Description : Returns command index of last command for which response
+* received.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Returns the command index of the last command response received.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u8 SDIO_GetCommandResponse(void)
+{
+ return (u8)(SDIO->RESPCMD);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_GetResponse
+* Description : Returns response received from the card for the last command.
+* Input : - SDIO_RESP: Specifies the SDIO response register.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SDIO_RESP1: Response Register 1
+* - SDIO_RESP2: Response Register 2
+* - SDIO_RESP3: Response Register 3
+* - SDIO_RESP4: Response Register 4
+* Output : None
+* Return : The Corresponding response register value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 SDIO_GetResponse(u32 SDIO_RESP)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_RESP(SDIO_RESP));
+
+ return (*(vu32 *)(SDIO_RESP_ADDR + SDIO_RESP));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_DataConfig
+* Description : Initializes the SDIO data path according to the specified
+* parameters in the SDIO_DataInitStruct.
+* Input : SDIO_DataInitStruct : pointer to a SDIO_DataInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the configuration information
+* for the SDIO command.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_DataConfig(SDIO_DataInitTypeDef* SDIO_DataInitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_DATA_LENGTH(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataLength));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_BLOCK_SIZE(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataBlockSize));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_TRANSFER_DIR(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferDir));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_TRANSFER_MODE(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferMode));
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_DPSM(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DPSM));
+
+/*---------------------------- SDIO DTIMER Configuration ---------------------*/
+ /* Set the SDIO Data TimeOut value */
+ SDIO->DTIMER = SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataTimeOut;
+
+/*---------------------------- SDIO DLEN Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Set the SDIO DataLength value */
+ SDIO->DLEN = SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataLength;
+
+/*---------------------------- SDIO DCTRL Configuration ----------------------*/
+ /* Get the SDIO DCTRL value */
+ tmpreg = SDIO->DCTRL;
+
+ /* Clear DEN, DTMODE, DTDIR and DBCKSIZE bits */
+ tmpreg &= DCTRL_CLEAR_MASK;
+ /* Set DEN bit according to SDIO_DPSM value */
+ /* Set DTMODE bit according to SDIO_TransferMode value */
+ /* Set DTDIR bit according to SDIO_TransferDir value */
+ /* Set DBCKSIZE bits according to SDIO_DataBlockSize value */
+ tmpreg |= (u32)SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataBlockSize | SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferDir
+ | SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferMode | SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DPSM;
+
+ /* Write to SDIO DCTRL */
+ SDIO->DCTRL = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_DataStructInit
+* Description : Fills each SDIO_DataInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : SDIO_DataInitStruct: pointer to an SDIO_DataInitTypeDef
+* structure which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_DataStructInit(SDIO_DataInitTypeDef* SDIO_DataInitStruct)
+{
+ /* SDIO_DataInitStruct members default value */
+ SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataTimeOut = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+ SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataLength = 0x00;
+ SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataBlockSize = SDIO_DataBlockSize_1b;
+ SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferDir = SDIO_TransferDir_ToCard;
+ SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferMode = SDIO_TransferMode_Block;
+ SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DPSM = SDIO_DPSM_Disable;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_GetDataCounter
+* Description : Returns number of remaining data bytes to be transferred.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Number of remaining data bytes to be transferred
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 SDIO_GetDataCounter(void)
+{
+ return SDIO->DCOUNT;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_ReadData
+* Description : Read one data word from Rx FIFO.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Data received
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 SDIO_ReadData(void)
+{
+ return SDIO->FIFO;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_WriteData
+* Description : Write one data word to Tx FIFO.
+* Input : Data: 32-bit data word to write.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_WriteData(u32 Data)
+{
+ SDIO->FIFO = Data;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_GetFIFOCount
+* Description : Returns the number of words left to be written to or read
+* from FIFO.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : Remaining number of words.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 SDIO_GetFIFOCount(void)
+{
+ return SDIO->FIFOCNT;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_StartSDIOReadWait
+* Description : Starts the SD I/O Read Wait operation.
+* Input : NewState: new state of the Start SDIO Read Wait operation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_StartSDIOReadWait(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) DCTRL_RWSTART_BB = (u32) NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_StopSDIOReadWait
+* Description : Stops the SD I/O Read Wait operation.
+* Input : NewState: new state of the Stop SDIO Read Wait operation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_StopSDIOReadWait(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) DCTRL_RWSTOP_BB = (u32) NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_SetSDIOReadWaitMode
+* Description : Sets one of the two options of inserting read wait interval.
+* Input : SDIOReadWaitMode: SD I/O Read Wait operation mode.
+* This parametre can be:
+* - SDIO_ReadWaitMode_CLK: Read Wait control by stopping SDIOCLK
+* - SDIO_ReadWaitMode_DATA2: Read Wait control using SDIO_DATA2
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_SetSDIOReadWaitMode(u32 SDIO_ReadWaitMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_READWAIT_MODE(SDIO_ReadWaitMode));
+
+ *(vu32 *) DCTRL_RWMOD_BB = SDIO_ReadWaitMode;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_SetSDIOOperation
+* Description : Enables or disables the SD I/O Mode Operation.
+* Input : NewState: new state of SDIO specific operation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_SetSDIOOperation(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) DCTRL_SDIOEN_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_SendSDIOSuspendCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the SD I/O Mode suspend command sending.
+* Input : NewState: new state of the SD I/O Mode suspend command.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_SendSDIOSuspendCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CMD_SDIOSUSPEND_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_CommandCompletionCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the command completion signal.
+* Input : NewState: new state of command completion signal.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_CommandCompletionCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CMD_ENCMDCOMPL_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_CEATAITCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the CE-ATA interrupt.
+* Input : NewState: new state of CE-ATA interrupt.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_CEATAITCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CMD_NIEN_BB = (u32)((~((u32)NewState)) & ((u32)0x1));
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_SendCEATACmd
+* Description : Sends CE-ATA command (CMD61).
+* Input : NewState: new state of CE-ATA command.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_SendCEATACmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ *(vu32 *) CMD_ATACMD_BB = (u32)NewState;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified SDIO flag is set or not.
+* Input : SDIO_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check
+* failed)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* failed)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout
+* - SDIO_FLAG_DTIMEOUT: Data timeou
+* - SDIO_FLAG_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error
+* - SDIO_FLAG_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check
+* passed)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is
+* zero)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data
+* signals in wide bus mode
+* - SDIO_FLAG_DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* passed)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDACT: Command transfer in progress
+* - SDIO_FLAG_TXACT: Data transmit in progress
+* - SDIO_FLAG_RXACT: Data receive in progress
+* - SDIO_FLAG_TXFIFOHE: Transmit FIFO Half Empty
+* - SDIO_FLAG_RXFIFOHF: Receive FIFO Half Full
+* - SDIO_FLAG_TXFIFOF: Transmit FIFO full
+* - SDIO_FLAG_RXFIFOF: Receive FIFO full
+* - SDIO_FLAG_TXFIFOE: Transmit FIFO empty
+* - SDIO_FLAG_RXFIFOE: Receive FIFO empty
+* - SDIO_FLAG_TXDAVL: Data available in transmit FIFO
+* - SDIO_FLAG_RXDAVL: Data available in receive FIFO
+* - SDIO_FLAG_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal
+* received for CMD61
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of SDIO_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus SDIO_GetFlagStatus(u32 SDIO_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_FLAG(SDIO_FLAG));
+
+ if ((SDIO->STA & SDIO_FLAG) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the SDIO's pending flags.
+* Input : SDIO_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* This parameter can be one or a combination of the following
+* values:
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check
+* failed)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* failed)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout
+* - SDIO_FLAG_DTIMEOUT: Data timeou
+* - SDIO_FLAG_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error
+* - SDIO_FLAG_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check
+* passed)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is
+* zero)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data
+* signals in wide bus mode
+* - SDIO_FLAG_DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* passed)
+* - SDIO_FLAG_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received
+* - SDIO_FLAG_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal
+* received for CMD61
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_ClearFlag(u32 SDIO_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLEAR_FLAG(SDIO_FLAG));
+
+ SDIO->ICR = SDIO_FLAG;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified SDIO interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : SDIO_IT: specifies the SDIO interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SDIO_IT_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check
+* failed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* failed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DTIMEOUT: Data timeout interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check
+* passed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required)
+* interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is
+* zero) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data
+* signals in wide bus mode interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* passed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CMDACT: Command transfer in progress interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXACT: Data transmit in progress interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXACT: Data receive in progress interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOHE: Transmit FIFO Half Empty interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOHF: Receive FIFO Half Full interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOF: Transmit FIFO full interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOF: Receive FIFO full interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOE: Transmit FIFO empty interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOE: Receive FIFO empty interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXDAVL: Data available in transmit FIFO interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXDAVL: Data available in receive FIFO interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal
+* received for CMD61 interrupt
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of SDIO_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus SDIO_GetITStatus(u32 SDIO_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_GET_IT(SDIO_IT));
+
+ if ((SDIO->STA & SDIO_IT) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SDIO_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the SDIO’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : SDIO_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be one or a combination of the following
+* values:
+* - SDIO_IT_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check
+* failed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check
+* failed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DTIMEOUT: Data timeout interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check
+* passed) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required)
+* interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is
+* zero) interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data
+* signals in wide bus mode interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received interrupt
+* - SDIO_IT_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal
+* received for CMD61
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SDIO_ClearITPendingBit(u32 SDIO_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLEAR_IT(SDIO_IT));
+
+ SDIO->ICR = SDIO_IT;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_spi.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_spi.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d914c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_spi.c @@ -0,0 +1,863 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_spi.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the SPI firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_spi.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* SPI SPE mask */
+#define CR1_SPE_Set ((u16)0x0040)
+#define CR1_SPE_Reset ((u16)0xFFBF)
+
+/* I2S I2SE mask */
+#define I2SCFGR_I2SE_Set ((u16)0x0400)
+#define I2SCFGR_I2SE_Reset ((u16)0xFBFF)
+
+/* SPI CRCNext mask */
+#define CR1_CRCNext_Set ((u16)0x1000)
+
+/* SPI CRCEN mask */
+#define CR1_CRCEN_Set ((u16)0x2000)
+#define CR1_CRCEN_Reset ((u16)0xDFFF)
+
+/* SPI SSOE mask */
+#define CR2_SSOE_Set ((u16)0x0004)
+#define CR2_SSOE_Reset ((u16)0xFFFB)
+
+/* SPI registers Masks */
+#define CR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0x3040)
+#define I2SCFGR_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xF040)
+
+/* SPI or I2S mode selection masks */
+#define SPI_Mode_Select ((u16)0xF7FF)
+#define I2S_Mode_Select ((u16)0x0800)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the SPIx peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values (Affects also the I2Ss).
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_I2S_DeInit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ switch (*(u32*)&SPIx)
+ {
+ case SPI1_BASE:
+ /* Enable SPI1 reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, ENABLE);
+ /* Release SPI1 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case SPI2_BASE:
+ /* Enable SPI2 reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE);
+ /* Release SPI2 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case SPI3_BASE:
+ /* Enable SPI3 reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE);
+ /* Release SPI3 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_Init
+* Description : Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the SPI_InitStruct.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - SPI_InitStruct: pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure that
+* contains the configuration information for the specified
+* SPI peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, SPI_InitTypeDef* SPI_InitStruct)
+{
+ u16 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ /* Check the SPI parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_DIRECTION_MODE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_MODE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_DATASIZE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CPOL(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CPHA(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_NSS(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_BAUDRATE_PRESCALER(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_FIRST_BIT(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC_POLYNOMIAL(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial));
+
+/*---------------------------- SPIx CR1 Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Get the SPIx CR1 value */
+ tmpreg = SPIx->CR1;
+ /* Clear BIDIMode, BIDIOE, RxONLY, SSM, SSI, LSBFirst, BR, MSTR, CPOL and CPHA bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_Mask;
+ /* Configure SPIx: direction, NSS management, first transmitted bit, BaudRate prescaler
+ master/salve mode, CPOL and CPHA */
+ /* Set BIDImode, BIDIOE and RxONLY bits according to SPI_Direction value */
+ /* Set SSM, SSI and MSTR bits according to SPI_Mode and SPI_NSS values */
+ /* Set LSBFirst bit according to SPI_FirstBit value */
+ /* Set BR bits according to SPI_BaudRatePrescaler value */
+ /* Set CPOL bit according to SPI_CPOL value */
+ /* Set CPHA bit according to SPI_CPHA value */
+ tmpreg |= (u16)((u32)SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode |
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL |
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS |
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit);
+ /* Write to SPIx CR1 */
+ SPIx->CR1 = tmpreg;
+
+ /* Activate the SPI mode (Reset I2SMOD bit in I2SCFGR register) */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR &= SPI_Mode_Select;
+
+/*---------------------------- SPIx CRCPOLY Configuration --------------------*/
+ /* Write to SPIx CRCPOLY */
+ SPIx->CRCPR = SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2S_Init
+* Description : Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the I2S_InitStruct.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral
+* (configured in I2S mode).
+* - I2S_InitStruct: pointer to an I2S_InitTypeDef structure that
+* contains the configuration information for the specified
+* SPI peripheral configured in I2S mode.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+******************************************************************************/
+void I2S_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct)
+{
+ u16 tmpreg = 0, i2sdiv = 2, i2sodd = 0, packetlength = 1;
+ u32 tmp = 0;
+ RCC_ClocksTypeDef RCC_Clocks;
+
+ /* Check the I2S parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_23_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_MODE(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_STANDARD(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_DATA_FORMAT(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_MCLK_OUTPUT(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_AUDIO_FREQ(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_CPOL(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL));
+
+/*----------------------- SPIx I2SCFGR & I2SPR Configuration -----------------*/
+
+ /* Clear I2SMOD, I2SE, I2SCFG, PCMSYNC, I2SSTD, CKPOL, DATLEN and CHLEN bits */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR &= I2SCFGR_CLEAR_Mask;
+ SPIx->I2SPR = 0x0002;
+
+ /* Get the I2SCFGR register value */
+ tmpreg = SPIx->I2SCFGR;
+
+ /* If the default value has to be written, reinitialize i2sdiv and i2sodd*/
+ if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq == I2S_AudioFreq_Default)
+ {
+ i2sodd = (u16)0;
+ i2sdiv = (u16)2;
+ }
+ /* If the requested audio frequency is not the default, compute the prescaler */
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check the frame length (For the Prescaler computing) */
+ if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat == I2S_DataFormat_16b)
+ {
+ /* Packet length is 16 bits */
+ packetlength = 1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Packet length is 32 bits */
+ packetlength = 2;
+ }
+ /* Get System Clock frequency */
+ RCC_GetClocksFreq(&RCC_Clocks);
+
+ /* Compute the Real divider depending on the MCLK output state with a flaoting point */
+ if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput == I2S_MCLKOutput_Enable)
+ {
+ /* MCLK output is enabled */
+ tmp = (u16)(((10 * RCC_Clocks.SYSCLK_Frequency) / (256 * I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)) + 5);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* MCLK output is disabled */
+ tmp = (u16)(((10 * RCC_Clocks.SYSCLK_Frequency) / (32 * packetlength * I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)) + 5);
+ }
+
+ /* Remove the flaoting point */
+ tmp = tmp/10;
+
+ /* Check the parity of the divider */
+ i2sodd = (u16)(tmp & (u16)0x0001);
+
+ /* Compute the i2sdiv prescaler */
+ i2sdiv = (u16)((tmp - i2sodd) / 2);
+
+ /* Get the Mask for the Odd bit (SPI_I2SPR[8]) register */
+ i2sodd = (u16) (i2sodd << 8);
+ }
+
+ /* Test if the divider is 1 or 0 */
+ if ((i2sdiv < 2) || (i2sdiv > 0xFF))
+ {
+ /* Set the default values */
+ i2sdiv = 2;
+ i2sodd = 0;
+ }
+
+ /* Write to SPIx I2SPR register the computed value */
+ SPIx->I2SPR = (u16)(i2sdiv | i2sodd | I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput);
+
+ /* Configure the I2S with the SPI_InitStruct values */
+ tmpreg |= (u16)(I2S_Mode_Select | I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode | \
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard | I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat | \
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL);
+
+ /* Write to SPIx I2SCFGR */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each SPI_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - SPI_InitStruct : pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_StructInit(SPI_InitTypeDef* SPI_InitStruct)
+{
+/*--------------- Reset SPI init structure parameters values -----------------*/
+ /* Initialize the SPI_Direction member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction = SPI_Direction_2Lines_FullDuplex;
+
+ /* initialize the SPI_Mode member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode = SPI_Mode_Slave;
+
+ /* initialize the SPI_DataSize member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize = SPI_DataSize_8b;
+
+ /* Initialize the SPI_CPOL member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL = SPI_CPOL_Low;
+
+ /* Initialize the SPI_CPHA member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA = SPI_CPHA_1Edge;
+
+ /* Initialize the SPI_NSS member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS = SPI_NSS_Hard;
+
+ /* Initialize the SPI_BaudRatePrescaler member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler = SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_2;
+
+ /* Initialize the SPI_FirstBit member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit = SPI_FirstBit_MSB;
+
+ /* Initialize the SPI_CRCPolynomial member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial = 7;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2S_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each I2S_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - I2S_InitStruct : pointer to a I2S_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2S_StructInit(I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct)
+{
+/*--------------- Reset I2S init structure parameters values -----------------*/
+ /* Initialize the I2S_Mode member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode = I2S_Mode_SlaveTx;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_Standard member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard = I2S_Standard_Phillips;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_DataFormat member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat = I2S_DataFormat_16b;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_MCLKOutput member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput = I2S_MCLKOutput_Disable;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_AudioFreq member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq = I2S_AudioFreq_Default;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_CPOL member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL = I2S_CPOL_Low;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_Cmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI peripheral */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= CR1_SPE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI peripheral */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= CR1_SPE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : I2S_Cmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral (in I2S mode).
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void I2S_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_23_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI peripheral (in I2S mode) */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR |= I2SCFGR_I2SE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI peripheral (in I2S mode) */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR &= I2SCFGR_I2SE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified SPI/I2S interrupts.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be :
+* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode
+* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode
+* - SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI/I2S interrupt source to be
+* enabled or disabled.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: Tx buffer empty interrupt mask
+* - SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE: Rx buffer not empty interrupt mask
+* - SPI_I2S_IT_ERR: Error interrupt mask
+* - NewState: new state of the specified SPI/I2S interrupt.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u8 SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ u16 itpos = 0, itmask = 0 ;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CONFIG_IT(SPI_I2S_IT));
+
+ /* Get the SPI/I2S IT index */
+ itpos = SPI_I2S_IT >> 4;
+ /* Set the IT mask */
+ itmask = (u16)((u16)1 << itpos);
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI/I2S interrupt */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= itmask;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI/I2S interrupt */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= (u16)~itmask;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_DMACmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the SPIx/I2Sx DMA interface.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be :
+* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode
+* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode
+* - SPI_I2S_DMAReq: specifies the SPI/I2S DMA transfer request
+* to be enabled or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: Tx buffer DMA transfer request
+* - SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: Rx buffer DMA transfer request
+* - NewState: new state of the selected SPI/I2S DMA transfer
+* request.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_DMAREQ(SPI_I2S_DMAReq));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI/I2S DMA requests */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_I2S_DMAReq;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI/I2S DMA requests */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= (u16)~SPI_I2S_DMAReq;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_SendData
+* Description : Transmits a Data through the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be :
+* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode
+* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode
+* - Data : Data to be transmitted..
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_I2S_SendData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ /* Write in the DR register the data to be sent */
+ SPIx->DR = Data;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_ReceiveData
+* Description : Returns the most recent received data by the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be :
+* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode
+* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode
+* Output : None
+* Return : The value of the received data.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 SPI_I2S_ReceiveData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ /* Return the data in the DR register */
+ return SPIx->DR;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig
+* Description : Configures internally by software the NSS pin for the selected
+* SPI.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - SPI_NSSInternalSoft: specifies the SPI NSS internal state.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set: Set NSS pin internally
+* - SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset: Reset NSS pin internally
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_NSSInternalSoft)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_NSS_INTERNAL(SPI_NSSInternalSoft));
+
+ if (SPI_NSSInternalSoft != SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset)
+ {
+ /* Set NSS pin internally by software */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset NSS pin internally by software */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_SSOutputCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the SS output for the selected SPI.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the SPIx SS output.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_SSOutputCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI SS output */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= CR2_SSOE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI SS output */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= CR2_SSOE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_DataSizeConfig
+* Description : Configures the data size for the selected SPI.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - SPI_DataSize: specifies the SPI data size.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SPI_DataSize_16b: Set data frame format to 16bit
+* - SPI_DataSize_8b: Set data frame format to 8bit
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_DataSizeConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_DataSize)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_DATASIZE(SPI_DataSize));
+
+ /* Clear DFF bit */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= (u16)~SPI_DataSize_16b;
+ /* Set new DFF bit value */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_DataSize;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_TransmitCRC
+* Description : Transmit the SPIx CRC value.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_TransmitCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ /* Enable the selected SPI CRC transmission */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= CR1_CRCNext_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_CalculateCRC
+* Description : Enables or disables the CRC value calculation of the
+* transfered bytes.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the SPIx CRC value calculation.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_CalculateCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI CRC calculation */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= CR1_CRCEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI CRC calculation */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= CR1_CRCEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_GetCRC
+* Description : Returns the transmit or the receive CRC register value for
+* the specified SPI.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - SPI_CRC: specifies the CRC register to be read.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SPI_CRC_Tx: Selects Tx CRC register
+* - SPI_CRC_Rx: Selects Rx CRC register
+* Output : None
+* Return : The selected CRC register value..
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 SPI_GetCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u8 SPI_CRC)
+{
+ u16 crcreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC(SPI_CRC));
+
+ if (SPI_CRC != SPI_CRC_Rx)
+ {
+ /* Get the Tx CRC register */
+ crcreg = SPIx->TXCRCR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get the Rx CRC register */
+ crcreg = SPIx->RXCRCR;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the selected CRC register */
+ return crcreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_GetCRCPolynomial
+* Description : Returns the CRC Polynomial register value for the specified SPI.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The CRC Polynomial register value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 SPI_GetCRCPolynomial(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ /* Return the CRC polynomial register */
+ return SPIx->CRCPR;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig
+* Description : Selects the data transfer direction in bi-directional mode
+* for the specified SPI.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
+* - SPI_Direction: specifies the data transfer direction in
+* bi-directional mode.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SPI_Direction_Tx: Selects Tx transmission direction
+* - SPI_Direction_Rx: Selects Rx receive direction
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_Direction)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_DIRECTION(SPI_Direction));
+
+ if (SPI_Direction == SPI_Direction_Tx)
+ {
+ /* Set the Tx only mode */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_Direction_Tx;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set the Rx only mode */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= SPI_Direction_Rx;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified SPI/I2S flag is set or not.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be :
+* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode
+* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode
+* - SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI/I2S flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE: Transmit buffer empty flag.
+* - SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE: Receive buffer not empty flag.
+* - SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY: Busy flag.
+* - SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR: Overrun flag.
+* - SPI_FLAG_MODF: Mode Fault flag.
+* - SPI_FLAG_CRCERR: CRC Error flag.
+* - I2S_FLAG_UDR: Underrun Error flag.
+* - I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: Channel Side flag.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of SPI_I2S_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_I2S_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_GET_FLAG(SPI_I2S_FLAG));
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified SPI/I2S flag */
+ if ((SPIx->SR & SPI_I2S_FLAG) != (u16)RESET)
+ {
+ /* SPI_I2S_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* SPI_I2S_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the SPI_I2S_FLAG status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) flag.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be :
+* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode
+* - SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI flag to clear.
+* This function clears only CRCERR flag.
+* Notes:
+* - OVR (OverRun error) flag is cleared by software
+* sequence: a read operation to SPI_DR register
+* (SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()) followed by a read operation
+* to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()).
+* - UDR (UnderRun error) flag is cleared by a read
+* operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()).
+* - MODF (Mode Fault) flag is cleared by software sequence:
+* a read/write operation to SPI_SR register
+* (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write
+* operation to SPI_CR1 register (SPI_Cmd() to enable
+* the SPI).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_I2S_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CLEAR_FLAG(SPI_I2S_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the selected SPI CRC Error (CRCERR) flag */
+ SPIx->SR = (u16)~SPI_I2S_FLAG;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified SPI/I2S interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be :
+* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode
+* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode
+* - SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI/I2S interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: Transmit buffer empty interrupt.
+* - SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE: Receive buffer not empty interrupt.
+* - SPI_I2S_IT_OVR: Overrun interrupt.
+* - SPI_IT_MODF: Mode Fault interrupt.
+* - SPI_IT_CRCERR: CRC Error interrupt.
+* - I2S_IT_UDR: Underrun Error interrupt.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of SPI_I2S_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u8 SPI_I2S_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u16 itpos = 0, itmask = 0, enablestatus = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_GET_IT(SPI_I2S_IT));
+
+ /* Get the SPI/I2S IT index */
+ itpos = (u16)((u16)0x01 << (SPI_I2S_IT & (u8)0x0F));
+
+ /* Get the SPI/I2S IT mask */
+ itmask = SPI_I2S_IT >> 4;
+ /* Set the IT mask */
+ itmask = (u16)((u16)0x01 << itmask);
+ /* Get the SPI_I2S_IT enable bit status */
+ enablestatus = (SPIx->CR2 & itmask) ;
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified SPI/I2S interrupt */
+ if (((SPIx->SR & itpos) != (u16)RESET) && enablestatus)
+ {
+ /* SPI_I2S_IT is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* SPI_I2S_IT is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the SPI_I2S_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) interrupt pending bit.
+* Input : - SPIx: where x can be :
+* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode
+* - SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This function clears only CRCERR intetrrupt pending bit.
+* Notes:
+* - OVR (OverRun Error) interrupt pending bit is cleared
+* by software sequence: a read operation to SPI_DR
+* register (SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()) followed by a read
+* operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()).
+* - UDR (UnderRun Error) interrupt pending bit is cleared
+* by a read operation to SPI_SR register
+* (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()).
+* - MODF (Mode Fault) interrupt pending bit is cleared by
+* software sequence: a read/write operation to SPI_SR
+* register (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()) followed by a write
+* operation to SPI_CR1 register (SPI_Cmd() to enable the
+* SPI).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u8 SPI_I2S_IT)
+{
+ u16 itpos = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CLEAR_IT(SPI_I2S_IT));
+
+ /* Get the SPI IT index */
+ itpos = (u16)((u16)0x01 << (SPI_I2S_IT & (u8)0x0F));
+ /* Clear the selected SPI CRC Error (CRCERR) interrupt pending bit */
+ SPIx->SR = (u16)~itpos;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_systick.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_systick.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..53deb76 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_systick.c @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_systick.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the SysTick firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_systick.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ---------------------- SysTick registers bit mask -------------------- */
+/* CTRL TICKINT Mask */
+#define CTRL_TICKINT_Set ((u32)0x00000002)
+#define CTRL_TICKINT_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFFD)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SysTick_CLKSourceConfig
+* Description : Configures the SysTick clock source.
+* Input : - SysTick_CLKSource: specifies the SysTick clock source.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8: AHB clock divided by 8
+* selected as SysTick clock source.
+* - SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK: AHB clock selected as
+* SysTick clock source.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SysTick_CLKSourceConfig(u32 SysTick_CLKSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_CLK_SOURCE(SysTick_CLKSource));
+
+ if (SysTick_CLKSource == SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK)
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL |= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL &= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SysTick_SetReload
+* Description : Sets SysTick Reload value.
+* Input : - Reload: SysTick Reload new value.
+* This parameter must be a number between 1 and 0xFFFFFF.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SysTick_SetReload(u32 Reload)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_RELOAD(Reload));
+
+ SysTick->LOAD = Reload;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SysTick_CounterCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the SysTick counter.
+* Input : - SysTick_Counter: new state of the SysTick counter.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SysTick_Counter_Disable: Disable counter
+* - SysTick_Counter_Enable: Enable counter
+* - SysTick_Counter_Clear: Clear counter value to 0
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SysTick_CounterCmd(u32 SysTick_Counter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_COUNTER(SysTick_Counter));
+
+ if (SysTick_Counter == SysTick_Counter_Enable)
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL |= SysTick_Counter_Enable;
+ }
+ else if (SysTick_Counter == SysTick_Counter_Disable)
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL &= SysTick_Counter_Disable;
+ }
+ else /* SysTick_Counter == SysTick_Counter_Clear */
+ {
+ SysTick->VAL = SysTick_Counter_Clear;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SysTick_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the SysTick Interrupt.
+* Input : - NewState: new state of the SysTick Interrupt.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void SysTick_ITConfig(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL |= CTRL_TICKINT_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL &= CTRL_TICKINT_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SysTick_GetCounter
+* Description : Gets SysTick counter value.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : SysTick current value
+*******************************************************************************/
+u32 SysTick_GetCounter(void)
+{
+ return(SysTick->VAL);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : SysTick_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified SysTick flag is set or not.
+* Input : - SysTick_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - SysTick_FLAG_COUNT
+* - SysTick_FLAG_SKEW
+* - SysTick_FLAG_NOREF
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus SysTick_GetFlagStatus(u8 SysTick_FLAG)
+{
+ u32 statusreg = 0, tmp = 0 ;
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_FLAG(SysTick_FLAG));
+
+ /* Get the SysTick register index */
+ tmp = SysTick_FLAG >> 3;
+
+ if (tmp == 2) /* The flag to check is in CTRL register */
+ {
+ statusreg = SysTick->CTRL;
+ }
+ else /* The flag to check is in CALIB register */
+ {
+ statusreg = SysTick->CALIB;
+ }
+
+ if ((statusreg & ((u32)1 << SysTick_FLAG)) != (u32)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_tim.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_tim.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca971e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_tim.c @@ -0,0 +1,3219 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_tim.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the TIM firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_tim.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ---------------------- TIM registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+#define CR1_CEN_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define CR1_CEN_Reset ((u16)0x03FE)
+#define CR1_UDIS_Set ((u16)0x0002)
+#define CR1_UDIS_Reset ((u16)0x03FD)
+#define CR1_URS_Set ((u16)0x0004)
+#define CR1_URS_Reset ((u16)0x03FB)
+#define CR1_OPM_Reset ((u16)0x03F7)
+#define CR1_CounterMode_Mask ((u16)0x038F)
+#define CR1_ARPE_Set ((u16)0x0080)
+#define CR1_ARPE_Reset ((u16)0x037F)
+#define CR1_CKD_Mask ((u16)0x00FF)
+
+#define CR2_CCPC_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define CR2_CCPC_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE)
+#define CR2_CCUS_Set ((u16)0x0004)
+#define CR2_CCUS_Reset ((u16)0xFFFB)
+#define CR2_CCDS_Set ((u16)0x0008)
+#define CR2_CCDS_Reset ((u16)0xFFF7)
+#define CR2_MMS_Mask ((u16)0xFF8F)
+#define CR2_TI1S_Set ((u16)0x0080)
+#define CR2_TI1S_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F)
+#define CR2_OIS1_Reset ((u16)0x7EFF)
+#define CR2_OIS1N_Reset ((u16)0x7DFF)
+#define CR2_OIS2_Reset ((u16)0x7BFF)
+#define CR2_OIS2N_Reset ((u16)0x77FF)
+#define CR2_OIS3_Reset ((u16)0x6FFF)
+#define CR2_OIS3N_Reset ((u16)0x5FFF)
+#define CR2_OIS4_Reset ((u16)0x3FFF)
+
+#define SMCR_SMS_Mask ((u16)0xFFF8)
+#define SMCR_ETR_Mask ((u16)0x00FF)
+#define SMCR_TS_Mask ((u16)0xFF8F)
+#define SMCR_MSM_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F)
+#define SMCR_ECE_Set ((u16)0x4000)
+
+#define CCMR_CC13S_Mask ((u16)0xFFFC)
+#define CCMR_CC24S_Mask ((u16)0xFCFF)
+#define CCMR_TI13Direct_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define CCMR_TI24Direct_Set ((u16)0x0100)
+#define CCMR_OC13FE_Reset ((u16)0xFFFB)
+#define CCMR_OC24FE_Reset ((u16)0xFBFF)
+#define CCMR_OC13PE_Reset ((u16)0xFFF7)
+#define CCMR_OC24PE_Reset ((u16)0xF7FF)
+#define CCMR_OC13M_Mask ((u16)0xFF8F)
+#define CCMR_OC24M_Mask ((u16)0x8FFF)
+
+#define CCMR_OC13CE_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F)
+#define CCMR_OC24CE_Reset ((u16)0x7FFF)
+
+#define CCMR_IC13PSC_Mask ((u16)0xFFF3)
+#define CCMR_IC24PSC_Mask ((u16)0xF3FF)
+#define CCMR_IC13F_Mask ((u16)0xFF0F)
+#define CCMR_IC24F_Mask ((u16)0x0FFF)
+
+#define CCMR_Offset ((u16)0x0018)
+#define CCER_CCE_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define CCER_CCNE_Set ((u16)0x0004)
+
+#define CCER_CC1P_Reset ((u16)0xFFFD)
+#define CCER_CC2P_Reset ((u16)0xFFDF)
+#define CCER_CC3P_Reset ((u16)0xFDFF)
+#define CCER_CC4P_Reset ((u16)0xDFFF)
+
+#define CCER_CC1NP_Reset ((u16)0xFFF7)
+#define CCER_CC2NP_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F)
+#define CCER_CC3NP_Reset ((u16)0xF7FF)
+
+#define CCER_CC1E_Set ((u16)0x0001)
+#define CCER_CC1E_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE)
+
+#define CCER_CC1NE_Reset ((u16)0xFFFB)
+
+#define CCER_CC2E_Set ((u16)0x0010)
+#define CCER_CC2E_Reset ((u16)0xFFEF)
+
+#define CCER_CC2NE_Reset ((u16)0xFFBF)
+
+#define CCER_CC3E_Set ((u16)0x0100)
+#define CCER_CC3E_Reset ((u16)0xFEFF)
+
+#define CCER_CC3NE_Reset ((u16)0xFBFF)
+
+#define CCER_CC4E_Set ((u16)0x1000)
+#define CCER_CC4E_Reset ((u16)0xEFFF)
+
+#define BDTR_MOE_Set ((u16)0x8000)
+#define BDTR_MOE_Reset ((u16)0x7FFF)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+static void TI1_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection,
+ u16 TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TI2_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection,
+ u16 TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TI3_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection,
+ u16 TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TI4_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection,
+ u16 TIM_ICFilter);
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the TIMx peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_DeInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ switch (*(u32*)&TIMx)
+ {
+ case TIM1_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case TIM2_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case TIM3_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case TIM4_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case TIM5_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM5, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM5, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case TIM6_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case TIM7_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case TIM8_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_TimeBaseInit
+* Description : Initializes the TIMx Time Base Unit peripheral according to
+* the specified parameters in the TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the configuration information for
+* the specified TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_TimeBaseInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef* TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CKD_DIV(TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision));
+
+ /* Select the Counter Mode and set the clock division */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_CKD_Mask & CR1_CounterMode_Mask;
+ TIMx->CR1 |= (u32)TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision |
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode;
+ /* Set the Autoreload value */
+ TIMx->ARR = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Period ;
+
+ /* Set the Prescaler value */
+ TIMx->PSC = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Prescaler;
+
+ /* Generate an update event to reload the Prescaler value immediatly */
+ TIMx->EGR = TIM_PSCReloadMode_Immediate;
+
+ if (((*(u32*)&TIMx) == TIM1_BASE) || ((*(u32*)&TIMx) == TIM8_BASE))
+ {
+ /* Set the Repetition Counter value */
+ TIMx->RCR = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_RepetitionCounter;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC1Init
+* Description : Initializes the TIMx Channel1 according to the specified
+* parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the specified
+* TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC1Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC1E_Reset;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask;
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC1P_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity;
+
+ /* Set the Output State */
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR1 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse;
+
+ if((*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM1_BASE) || (*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM8_BASE))
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState));
+
+ /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC1NP_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity;
+
+ /* Reset the Output N State */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC1NE_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output N State */
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState;
+
+ /* Reset the Ouput Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */
+ tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS1_Reset;
+ tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS1N_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState;
+
+ /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState;
+ }
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC2Init
+* Description : Initializes the TIMx Channel2 according to the specified
+* parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the specified
+* TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC2Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC2E_Reset;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask;
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode << 8);
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC2P_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 4);
+
+ /* Set the Output State */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 4);
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR2 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse;
+
+ if((*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM1_BASE) || (*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM8_BASE))
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState));
+
+ /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC2NP_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity << 4);
+
+ /* Reset the Output N State */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC2NE_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output N State */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState << 4);
+
+ /* Reset the Ouput Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */
+ tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS2_Reset;
+ tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS2N_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 2);
+
+ /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState << 2);
+ }
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC3Init
+* Description : Initializes the TIMx Channel3 according to the specified
+* parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the specified
+* TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC3Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC3E_Reset;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask;
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC3P_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 8);
+
+ /* Set the Output State */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 8);
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR3 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse;
+
+ if((*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM1_BASE) || (*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM8_BASE))
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState));
+
+ /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC3NP_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity << 8);
+
+ /* Reset the Output N State */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC3NE_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output N State */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState << 8);
+
+ /* Reset the Ouput Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */
+ tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS3_Reset;
+ tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS3N_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 4);
+
+ /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState << 4);
+ }
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC4Init
+* Description : Initializes the TIMx Channel4 according to the specified
+* parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the specified
+* TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC4Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC4E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC4E_Reset;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask;
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode << 8);
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC4P_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 12);
+
+ /* Set the Output State */
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 12);
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR4 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse;
+
+ if((*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM1_BASE) || (*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM8_BASE))
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState));
+
+ /* Reset the Ouput Compare IDLE State */
+ tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS4_Reset;
+
+ /* Set the Output Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 6);
+ }
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ICInit
+* Description : Initializes the TIM peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the TIM_ICInitStruct.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the specified
+* TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ICInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNEL(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter));
+
+ if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1)
+ {
+ /* TI1 Configuration */
+ TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+ else if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_2)
+ {
+ /* TI2 Configuration */
+ TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+ else if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_3)
+ {
+ /* TI3 Configuration */
+ TI3_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC3Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* TI4 Configuration */
+ TI4_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC4Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_PWMIConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIM peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the TIM_ICInitStruct to measure an external PWM
+* signal.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the specified
+* TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_PWMIConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct)
+{
+ u16 icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising;
+ u16 icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Select the Opposite Input Polarity */
+ if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity == TIM_ICPolarity_Rising)
+ {
+ icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Falling;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising;
+ }
+
+ /* Select the Opposite Input */
+ if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection == TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI)
+ {
+ icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI;
+ }
+
+ if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1)
+ {
+ /* TI1 Configuration */
+ TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+
+ /* TI2 Configuration */
+ TI2_Config(TIMx, icoppositepolarity, icoppositeselection, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* TI2 Configuration */
+ TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+
+ /* TI1 Configuration */
+ TI1_Config(TIMx, icoppositepolarity, icoppositeselection, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_BDTRConfig
+* Description : Configures the: Break feature, dead time, Lock level, the OSSI,
+* the OSSR State and the AOE(automatic output enable).
+* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM
+* - TIM_BDTRInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the BDTR Register configuration
+* information for the TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_BDTRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef *TIM_BDTRInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OSSR_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OSSI_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LOCK_LEVEL(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_POLARITY(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTOMATIC_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput));
+
+ /* Set the Lock level, the Break enable Bit and the Ploarity, the OSSR State,
+ the OSSI State, the dead time value and the Automatic Output Enable Bit */
+
+ TIMx->BDTR = (u32)TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState |
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_DeadTime |
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity |
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput;
+
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_TimeBaseStructInit
+* Description : Fills each TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef
+* structure which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_TimeBaseStructInit(TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef* TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Set the default configuration */
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Period = 0xFFFF;
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Prescaler = 0x0000;
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision = TIM_CKD_DIV1;
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode = TIM_CounterMode_Up;
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_RepetitionCounter = 0x0000;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OCStructInit
+* Description : Fills each TIM_OCInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OCStructInit(TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Set the default configuration */
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode = TIM_OCMode_Timing;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState = TIM_OutputState_Disable;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState = TIM_OutputNState_Disable;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse = 0x0000;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity = TIM_OCPolarity_High;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity = TIM_OCPolarity_High;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState = TIM_OCIdleState_Reset;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState = TIM_OCNIdleState_Reset;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ICStructInit
+* Description : Fills each TIM_ICInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - TIM_ICInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ICStructInit(TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Set the default configuration */
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel = TIM_Channel_1;
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising;
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI;
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler = TIM_ICPSC_DIV1;
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter = 0x00;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_BDTRStructInit
+* Description : Fills each TIM_BDTRInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - TIM_BDTRInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef
+* structure which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_BDTRStructInit(TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef* TIM_BDTRInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Set the default configuration */
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState = TIM_OSSRState_Disable;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState = TIM_OSSIState_Disable;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel = TIM_LOCKLevel_OFF;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_DeadTime = 0x00;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break = TIM_Break_Disable;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity = TIM_BreakPolarity_Low;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput = TIM_AutomaticOutput_Disable;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_Cmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified TIM peripheral.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIMx peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the TIMx peripheral.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_Cmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Counter */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= CR1_CEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Counter */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_CEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIM peripheral Main Outputs.
+* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the TIM peripheral Main Outputs.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Main Output */
+ TIMx->BDTR |= BDTR_MOE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Main Output */
+ TIMx->BDTR &= BDTR_MOE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified TIM interrupts.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIMx peripheral.
+* - TIM_IT: specifies the TIM interrupts sources to be enabled
+* or disabled.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - TIM_IT_Update: TIM update Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source
+* - NewState: new state of the TIM interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ITConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IT(TIM_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_IT((TIMx), (TIM_IT)));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Interrupt sources */
+ TIMx->DIER |= TIM_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Interrupt sources */
+ TIMx->DIER &= (u16)~TIM_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GenerateEvent
+* Description : Configures the TIMx event to be generate by software.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_EventSource: specifies the event source.
+* This parameter can be one or more of the following values:
+* - TIM_EventSource_Update: Timer update Event source
+* - TIM_EventSource_CC1: Timer Capture Compare 1 Event source
+* - TIM_EventSource_CC2: Timer Capture Compare 2 Event source
+* - TIM_EventSource_CC3: Timer Capture Compare 3 Event source
+* - TIM_EventSource_CC4: Timer Capture Compare 4 Event source
+* - TIM_EventSource_Trigger: Timer Trigger Event source
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_GenerateEvent(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_EventSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EVENT_SOURCE(TIM_EventSource));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_EVENT((TIMx), (TIM_EventSource)));
+
+ /* Set the event sources */
+ TIMx->EGR = TIM_EventSource;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_DMAConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx’s DMA interface.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_DMABase: DMA Base address.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_DMABase_CR, TIM_DMABase_CR2, TIM_DMABase_SMCR,
+* TIM_DMABase_DIER, TIM1_DMABase_SR, TIM_DMABase_EGR,
+* TIM_DMABase_CCMR1, TIM_DMABase_CCMR2, TIM_DMABase_CCER,
+* TIM_DMABase_CNT, TIM_DMABase_PSC, TIM_DMABase_ARR,
+* TIM_DMABase_RCR, TIM_DMABase_CCR1, TIM_DMABase_CCR2,
+* TIM_DMABase_CCR3, TIM_DMABase_CCR4, TIM_DMABase_BDTR,
+* TIM_DMABase_DCR.
+* - TIM_DMABurstLength: DMA Burst length.
+* This parameter can be one value between:
+* TIM_DMABurstLength_1Byte and TIM_DMABurstLength_18Bytes.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_DMAConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_DMABase, u16 TIM_DMABurstLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_BASE(TIM_DMABase));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_LENGTH(TIM_DMABurstLength));
+
+ /* Set the DMA Base and the DMA Burst Length */
+ TIMx->DCR = TIM_DMABase | TIM_DMABurstLength;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_DMACmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx’s DMA Requests.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_DMASources: specifies the DMA Request sources.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - TIM_DMA_Update: TIM update Interrupt source
+* - TIM_DMA_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 DMA source
+* - TIM_DMA_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 DMA source
+* - TIM_DMA_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 DMA source
+* - TIM_DMA_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 DMA source
+* - TIM_DMA_COM: TIM Commutation DMA source
+* - TIM_DMA_Trigger: TIM Trigger DMA source
+* - NewState: new state of the DMA Request sources.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_DMACmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_DMASource, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(TIM_DMASource));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_DMA(TIMx, TIM_DMASource));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the DMA sources */
+ TIMx->DIER |= TIM_DMASource;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the DMA sources */
+ TIMx->DIER &= (u16)~TIM_DMASource;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_InternalClockConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx interrnal Clock
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_InternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Disable slave mode to clock the prescaler directly with the internal clock */
+ TIMx->SMCR &= SMCR_SMS_Mask;
+}
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ITRxExternalClockConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Internal Trigger as External Clock
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ITRSource: Trigger source.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal Trigger 0
+* - TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal Trigger 1
+* - TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal Trigger 2
+* - TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal Trigger 3
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ITRxExternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_InputTriggerSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INTERNAL_TRIGGER_SELECTION(TIM_InputTriggerSource));
+
+ /* Select the Internal Trigger */
+ TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIMx, TIM_InputTriggerSource);
+
+ /* Select the External clock mode1 */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1;
+}
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_TIxExternalClockConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Trigger as External Clock
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource: Trigger source.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1ED: TI1 Edge Detector
+* - TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1: Filtered Timer Input 1
+* - TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI2: Filtered Timer Input 2
+* - TIM_ICPolarity: specifies the TIx Polarity.
+* This parameter can be:
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+* - ICFilter : specifies the filter value.
+* This parameter must be a value between 0x0 and 0xF.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_TIxExternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource,
+ u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 ICFilter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TIXCLK_SOURCE(TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_ICPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(ICFilter));
+
+ /* Configure the Timer Input Clock Source */
+ if (TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource == TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI2)
+ {
+ TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI, ICFilter);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI, ICFilter);
+ }
+
+ /* Select the Trigger source */
+ TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIMx, TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource);
+
+ /* Select the External clock mode1 */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ETRClockMode1Config
+* Description : Configures the External clock Mode1
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler.
+* It can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8.
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity.
+* It can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted
+* - ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter.
+* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ETRClockMode1Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPolarity,
+ u16 ExtTRGFilter)
+{
+ u16 tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter));
+
+ /* Configure the ETR Clock source */
+ TIM_ETRConfig(TIMx, TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, ExtTRGFilter);
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+
+ /* Reset the SMS Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= SMCR_SMS_Mask;
+ /* Select the External clock mode1 */
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1;
+
+ /* Select the Trigger selection : ETRF */
+ tmpsmcr &= SMCR_TS_Mask;
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_TS_ETRF;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ETRClockMode2Config
+* Description : Configures the External clock Mode2
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler.
+* It can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity.
+* It can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted
+* - ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter.
+* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ETRClockMode2Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
+ u16 TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, u16 ExtTRGFilter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter));
+
+ /* Configure the ETR Clock source */
+ TIM_ETRConfig(TIMx, TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, ExtTRGFilter);
+
+ /* Enable the External clock mode2 */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= SMCR_ECE_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ETRConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx External Trigger (ETR).
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted
+* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted
+* - ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter.
+* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ETRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPolarity,
+ u16 ExtTRGFilter)
+{
+ u16 tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter));
+
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+
+ /* Reset the ETR Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= SMCR_ETR_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the Prescaler, the Filter value and the Polarity */
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler | TIM_ExtTRGPolarity | (u16)(ExtTRGFilter << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_PrescalerConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Prescaler.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - Prescaler: specifies the Prescaler Register value
+* - TIM_PSCReloadMode: specifies the TIM Prescaler Reload mode
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_PSCReloadMode_Update: The Prescaler is loaded at
+* the update event.
+* - TIM_PSCReloadMode_Immediate: The Prescaler is loaded
+* immediatly.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_PrescalerConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Prescaler, u16 TIM_PSCReloadMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PRESCALER_RELOAD(TIM_PSCReloadMode));
+
+ /* Set the Prescaler value */
+ TIMx->PSC = Prescaler;
+
+ /* Set or reset the UG Bit */
+ TIMx->EGR = TIM_PSCReloadMode;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_CounterModeConfig
+* Description : Specifies the TIMx Counter Mode to be used.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_CounterMode: specifies the Counter Mode to be used
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_CounterMode_Up: TIM Up Counting Mode
+* - TIM_CounterMode_Down: TIM Down Counting Mode
+* - TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned1: TIM Center Aligned Mode1
+* - TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned2: TIM Center Aligned Mode2
+* - TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned3: TIM Center Aligned Mode3
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_CounterModeConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_CounterMode)
+{
+ u16 tmpcr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(TIM_CounterMode));
+
+ tmpcr1 = TIMx->CR1;
+
+ /* Reset the CMS and DIR Bits */
+ tmpcr1 &= CR1_CounterMode_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the Counter Mode */
+ tmpcr1 |= TIM_CounterMode;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CR1 register */
+ TIMx->CR1 = tmpcr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectInputTrigger
+* Description : Selects the Input Trigger source
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_InputTriggerSource: The Input Trigger source.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal Trigger 0
+* - TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal Trigger 1
+* - TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal Trigger 2
+* - TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal Trigger 3
+* - TIM_TS_TI1F_ED: TI1 Edge Detector
+* - TIM_TS_TI1FP1: Filtered Timer Input 1
+* - TIM_TS_TI2FP2: Filtered Timer Input 2
+* - TIM_TS_ETRF: External Trigger input
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_InputTriggerSource)
+{
+ u16 tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGER_SELECTION(TIM_InputTriggerSource));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+
+ /* Reset the TS Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= SMCR_TS_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the Input Trigger source */
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_InputTriggerSource;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_EncoderInterfaceConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Encoder Interface.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_EncoderMode: specifies the TIMx Encoder Mode.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_EncoderMode_TI1: Counter counts on TI1FP1 edge
+* depending on TI2FP2 level.
+* - TIM_EncoderMode_TI2: Counter counts on TI2FP2 edge
+* depending on TI1FP1 level.
+* - TIM_EncoderMode_TI12: Counter counts on both TI1FP1 and
+* TI2FP2 edges depending on the level of the other input.
+* - TIM_IC1Polarity: specifies the IC1 Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling: IC Falling edge.
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising: IC Rising edge.
+* - TIM_IC2Polarity: specifies the IC2 Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling: IC Falling edge.
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising: IC Rising edge.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_EncoderInterfaceConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_EncoderMode,
+ u16 TIM_IC1Polarity, u16 TIM_IC2Polarity)
+{
+ u16 tmpsmcr = 0;
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+ u16 tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ENCODER_MODE(TIM_EncoderMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_IC1Polarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_IC2Polarity));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set the encoder Mode */
+ tmpsmcr &= SMCR_SMS_Mask;
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_EncoderMode;
+
+ /* Select the Capture Compare 1 and the Capture Compare 2 as input */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_CC13S_Mask & CCMR_CC24S_Mask;
+ tmpccmr1 |= CCMR_TI13Direct_Set | CCMR_TI24Direct_Set;
+
+ /* Set the TI1 and the TI2 Polarities */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC1P_Reset & CCER_CC2P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= (TIM_IC1Polarity | (u16)(TIM_IC2Polarity << 4));
+
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ForcedOC1Config
+* Description : Forces the TIMx output 1 waveform to active or inactive level.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to
+* the output waveform.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC1REF
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on
+* OC1REF.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ForcedOC1Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ForcedAction)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the OC1M Bits */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure The Forced output Mode */
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_ForcedAction;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ForcedOC2Config
+* Description : Forces the TIMx output 2 waveform to active or inactive level.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to
+* the output waveform.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC2REF
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on
+* OC2REF.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ForcedOC2Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ForcedAction)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the OC2M Bits */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure The Forced output Mode */
+ tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_ForcedAction << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ForcedOC3Config
+* Description : Forces the TIMx output 3 waveform to active or inactive level.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to
+* the output waveform.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC3REF
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on
+* OC3REF.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ForcedOC3Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ForcedAction)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the OC1M Bits */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure The Forced output Mode */
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_ForcedAction;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ForcedOC4Config
+* Description : Forces the TIMx output 4 waveform to active or inactive level.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to
+* the output waveform.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC4REF
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on
+* OC4REF.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ForcedOC4Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ForcedAction)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction));
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the OC2M Bits */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure The Forced output Mode */
+ tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_ForcedAction << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ARRPreloadConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables TIMx peripheral Preload register on ARR.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload register
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ARRPreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the ARR Preload Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= CR1_ARPE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the ARR Preload Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_ARPE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectCOM
+* Description : Selects the TIM peripheral Commutation event.
+* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral
+* - NewState: new state of the Commutation event.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectCOM(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the COM Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= CR2_CCUS_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the COM Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_CCUS_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectCCDMA
+* Description : Selects the TIMx peripheral Capture Compare DMA source.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the Capture Compare DMA source
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectCCDMA(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the CCDS Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= CR2_CCDS_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the CCDS Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_CCDS_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_CCPreloadControl
+* Description : Sets or Resets the TIM peripheral Capture Compare Preload
+* Control bit.
+* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral
+* - NewState: new state of the Capture Compare Preload Control bit
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_CCPreloadControl(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the CCPC Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= CR2_CCPC_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the CCPC Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_CCPC_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC1PreloadConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR1.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
+* register
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCPreload_Enable
+* - TIM_OCPreload_Disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC1PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPreload)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the OC1PE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC13PE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCPreload;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC2PreloadConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR2.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
+* register
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCPreload_Enable
+* - TIM_OCPreload_Disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC2PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPreload)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the OC2PE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC24PE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */
+ tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_OCPreload << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC3PreloadConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR3.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
+* register
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCPreload_Enable
+* - TIM_OCPreload_Disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC3PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPreload)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the OC3PE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC13PE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCPreload;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC4PreloadConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR4.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload
+* register
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCPreload_Enable
+* - TIM_OCPreload_Disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC4PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPreload)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the OC4PE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC24PE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */
+ tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCPreload << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC1FastConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Output Compare 1 Fast feature.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable
+* - TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC1FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCFast)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the OC1FE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC13FE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCFast;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC2FastConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Output Compare 2 Fast feature.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable
+* - TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC2FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCFast)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the OC2FE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC24FE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_OCFast << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC3FastConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Output Compare 3 Fast feature.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable
+* - TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC3FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCFast)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the OC3FE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC13FE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCFast;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC4FastConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Output Compare 4 Fast feature.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable
+* - TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC4FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCFast)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the OC4FE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC24FE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCFast << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ClearOC1Ref
+* Description : Clears or safeguards the OCREF1 signal on an external event
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable
+* - TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ClearOC1Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCClear)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the OC1CE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC13CE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCClear;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ClearOC2Ref
+* Description : Clears or safeguards the OCREF2 signal on an external event
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable
+* - TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ClearOC2Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCClear)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the OC2CE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC24CE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_OCClear << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ClearOC3Ref
+* Description : Clears or safeguards the OCREF3 signal on an external event
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable
+* - TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ClearOC3Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCClear)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the OC3CE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC13CE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCClear;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ClearOC4Ref
+* Description : Clears or safeguards the OCREF4 signal on an external event
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable
+* - TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ClearOC4Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCClear)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the OC4CE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC24CE_Reset;
+
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCClear << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC1PolarityConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx channel 1 polarity.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC1 Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+* - TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC1PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPolarity)
+{
+ u16 tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set or Reset the CC1P Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC1P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCPolarity;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC1NPolarityConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Channel 1N polarity.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC1N Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC1NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCNPolarity)
+{
+ u16 tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set or Reset the CC1NP Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC1NP_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCNPolarity;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC2PolarityConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx channel 2 polarity.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC2 Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+* - TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC2PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPolarity)
+{
+ u16 tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set or Reset the CC2P Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC2P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCPolarity << 4);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC2NPolarityConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Channel 2N polarity.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC2N Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC2NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCNPolarity)
+{
+ u16 tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set or Reset the CC2NP Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC2NP_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCNPolarity << 4);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC3PolarityConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx channel 3 polarity.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC3 Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+* - TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC3PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPolarity)
+{
+ u16 tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set or Reset the CC3P Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC3P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCPolarity << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC3NPolarityConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Channel 3N polarity.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC3N Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+* - TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC3NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCNPolarity)
+{
+ u16 tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set or Reset the CC3NP Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC3NP_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCNPolarity << 8);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_OC4PolarityConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx channel 4 polarity.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC4 Polarity
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+* - TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_OC4PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPolarity)
+{
+ u16 tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set or Reset the CC4P Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC4P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCPolarity << 12);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_CCxCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel x.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1
+* - TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2
+* - TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3
+* - TIM_Channel_4: TIM Channel 4
+* - TIM_CCx: specifies the TIM Channel CCxE bit new state.
+* This parameter can be: TIM_CCx_Enable or TIM_CCx_Disable.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_CCxCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_Channel, u16 TIM_CCx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNEL(TIM_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX(TIM_CCx));
+
+ /* Reset the CCxE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (u16)(~((u16)(CCER_CCE_Set << TIM_Channel)));
+
+ /* Set or reset the CCxE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER |= (u16)(TIM_CCx << TIM_Channel);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_CCxNCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel xN.
+* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1
+* - TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2
+* - TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3
+* - TIM_CCx: specifies the TIM Channel CCxNE bit new state.
+* This parameter can be: TIM_CCxN_Enable or TIM_CCxN_Disable.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_CCxNCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_Channel, u16 TIM_CCxN)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COMPLEMENTARY_CHANNEL(TIM_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN(TIM_CCxN));
+
+ /* Reset the CCxNE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (u16)(~((u16)(CCER_CCNE_Set << TIM_Channel)));
+
+ /* Set or reset the CCxNE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER |= (u16)(TIM_CCxN << TIM_Channel);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectOCxM
+* Description : Selects the TIM Ouput Compare Mode.
+* This function disables the selected channel before changing
+* the Ouput Compare Mode. User has to enable this channel using
+* TIM_CCxCmd and TIM_CCxNCmd functions.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel
+* This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1
+* - TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2
+* - TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3
+* - TIM_Channel_4: TIM Channel 4
+* - TIM_OCMode: specifies the TIM Output Compare Mode.
+* This paramter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OCMode_Timing
+* - TIM_OCMode_Active
+* - TIM_OCMode_Toggle
+* - TIM_OCMode_PWM1
+* - TIM_OCMode_PWM2
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active
+* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectOCxM(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_Channel, u16 TIM_OCMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNEL(TIM_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCM(TIM_OCMode));
+
+ /* Disable the Channel: Reset the CCxE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (u16)(~((u16)(CCER_CCE_Set << TIM_Channel)));
+
+ if((TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1) ||(TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_3))
+ {
+ /* Reset the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */
+ *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&TIMx) + CCMR_Offset + (TIM_Channel>>1))) &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */
+ *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&TIMx) + CCMR_Offset + (TIM_Channel>>1))) = TIM_OCMode;
+
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */
+ *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&TIMx) + CCMR_Offset + ((u16)(TIM_Channel - 4)>> 1))) &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */
+ *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&TIMx) + CCMR_Offset + ((u16)(TIM_Channel - 4)>> 1))) = (u16)(TIM_OCMode << 8);
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_UpdateDisableConfig
+* Description : Enables or Disables the TIMx Update event.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the TIMx UDIS bit
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_UpdateDisableConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the Update Disable Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= CR1_UDIS_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the Update Disable Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_UDIS_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_UpdateRequestConfig
+* Description : Configures the TIMx Update Request Interrupt source.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_UpdateSource: specifies the Update source.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_UpdateSource_Regular
+* - TIM_UpdateSource_Global
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_UpdateRequestConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_UpdateSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_UPDATE_SOURCE(TIM_UpdateSource));
+
+ if (TIM_UpdateSource != TIM_UpdateSource_Global)
+ {
+ /* Set the URS Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= CR1_URS_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the URS Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_URS_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectHallSensor
+* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx’s Hall sensor interface.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - NewState: new state of the TIMx Hall sensor interface.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectHallSensor(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the TI1S Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= CR2_TI1S_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the TI1S Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_TI1S_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectOnePulseMode
+* Description : Selects the TIMx’s One Pulse Mode.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_OPMode: specifies the OPM Mode to be used.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_OPMode_Single
+* - TIM_OPMode_Repetitive
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectOnePulseMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OPMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_MODE(TIM_OPMode));
+
+ /* Reset the OPM Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_OPM_Reset;
+
+ /* Configure the OPM Mode */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_OPMode;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectOutputTrigger
+* Description : Selects the TIMx Trigger Output Mode.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_TRGOSource: specifies the Trigger Output source.
+* This paramter can be as follow:
+* 1/ For TIM1 to TIM8:
+* - TIM_TRGOSource_Reset
+* - TIM_TRGOSource_Enable
+* - TIM_TRGOSource_Update
+* 2/ These parameters are available for all TIMx except
+* TIM6 and TIM7:
+* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC1
+* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC1Ref
+* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC2Ref
+* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC3Ref
+* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC4Ref
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_TRGOSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRGO_SOURCE(TIM_TRGOSource));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_TRGO(TIMx, TIM_TRGOSource));
+
+ /* Reset the MMS Bits */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_MMS_Mask;
+
+ /* Select the TRGO source */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= TIM_TRGOSource;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectSlaveMode
+* Description : Selects the TIMx Slave Mode.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_SlaveMode: specifies the Timer Slave Mode.
+* This paramter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_SlaveMode_Reset
+* - TIM_SlaveMode_Gated
+* - TIM_SlaveMode_Trigger
+* - TIM_SlaveMode_External1
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_SlaveMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_MODE(TIM_SlaveMode));
+
+ /* Reset the SMS Bits */
+ TIMx->SMCR &= SMCR_SMS_Mask;
+
+ /* Select the Slave Mode */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode
+* Description : Sets or Resets the TIMx Master/Slave Mode.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_MasterSlaveMode: specifies the Timer Master Slave Mode.
+* This paramter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Enable: synchronization between the
+* current timer and its slaves (through TRGO).
+* - TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Disable: No action
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_MasterSlaveMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_MSM_STATE(TIM_MasterSlaveMode));
+
+ /* Reset the MSM Bit */
+ TIMx->SMCR &= SMCR_MSM_Reset;
+
+ /* Set or Reset the MSM Bit */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_MasterSlaveMode;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetCounter
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Counter Register value
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - Counter: specifies the Counter register new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetCounter(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Counter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Counter Register value */
+ TIMx->CNT = Counter;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetAutoreload
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Autoreload Register value
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - Autoreload: specifies the Autoreload register new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetAutoreload(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Autoreload)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Autoreload Register value */
+ TIMx->ARR = Autoreload;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetCompare1
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Capture Compare1 Register value
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - Compare1: specifies the Capture Compare1 register new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetCompare1(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Compare1)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare1 Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR1 = Compare1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetCompare2
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Capture Compare2 Register value
+* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - Compare2: specifies the Capture Compare2 register new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetCompare2(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Compare2)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare2 Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR2 = Compare2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetCompare3
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Capture Compare3 Register value
+* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - Compare3: specifies the Capture Compare3 register new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetCompare3(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Compare3)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare3 Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR3 = Compare3;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetCompare4
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Capture Compare4 Register value
+* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - Compare4: specifies the Capture Compare4 register new value.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetCompare4(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Compare4)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare4 Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR4 = Compare4;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetIC1Prescaler
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Input Capture 1 prescaler.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture1 prescaler
+* new value.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPSC)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC));
+
+ /* Reset the IC1PSC Bits */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 &= CCMR_IC13PSC_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the IC1PSC value */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 |= TIM_ICPSC;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetIC2Prescaler
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Input Capture 2 prescaler.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture2 prescaler
+* new value.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPSC)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC));
+
+ /* Reset the IC2PSC Bits */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 &= CCMR_IC24PSC_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the IC2PSC value */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 |= (u16)(TIM_ICPSC << 8);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetIC3Prescaler
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Input Capture 3 prescaler.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture3 prescaler
+* new value.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetIC3Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPSC)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC));
+
+ /* Reset the IC3PSC Bits */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 &= CCMR_IC13PSC_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the IC3PSC value */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 |= TIM_ICPSC;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetIC4Prescaler
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Input Capture 4 prescaler.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture4 prescaler
+* new value.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events
+* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetIC4Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPSC)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC));
+
+ /* Reset the IC4PSC Bits */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 &= CCMR_IC24PSC_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the IC4PSC value */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 |= (u16)(TIM_ICPSC << 8);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_SetClockDivision
+* Description : Sets the TIMx Clock Division value.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_CKD: specifies the clock division value.
+* This parameter can be one of the following value:
+* - TIM_CKD_DIV1: TDTS = Tck_tim
+* - TIM_CKD_DIV2: TDTS = 2*Tck_tim
+* - TIM_CKD_DIV4: TDTS = 4*Tck_tim
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_SetClockDivision(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_CKD)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CKD_DIV(TIM_CKD));
+
+ /* Reset the CKD Bits */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_CKD_Mask;
+
+ /* Set the CKD value */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_CKD;
+}
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GetCapture1
+* Description : Gets the TIMx Input Capture 1 value.
+* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : Capture Compare 1 Register value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 TIM_GetCapture1(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Capture 1 Register value */
+ return TIMx->CCR1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GetCapture2
+* Description : Gets the TIMx Input Capture 2 value.
+* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : Capture Compare 2 Register value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 TIM_GetCapture2(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Capture 2 Register value */
+ return TIMx->CCR2;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GetCapture3
+* Description : Gets the TIMx Input Capture 3 value.
+* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : Capture Compare 3 Register value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 TIM_GetCapture3(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Capture 3 Register value */
+ return TIMx->CCR3;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GetCapture4
+* Description : Gets the TIMx Input Capture 4 value.
+* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : Capture Compare 4 Register value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 TIM_GetCapture4(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Capture 4 Register value */
+ return TIMx->CCR4;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GetCounter
+* Description : Gets the TIMx Counter value.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : Counter Register value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 TIM_GetCounter(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Counter Register value */
+ return TIMx->CNT;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GetPrescaler
+* Description : Gets the TIMx Prescaler value.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : Prescaler Register value.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 TIM_GetPrescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Prescaler Register value */
+ return TIMx->PSC;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified TIM flag is set or not.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_FLAG_Update: TIM update Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_COM: TIM Commutation Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_Trigger: TIM Trigger Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_Break: TIM Break Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC1OF: TIM Capture Compare 1 overcapture Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC2OF: TIM Capture Compare 2 overcapture Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC3OF: TIM Capture Compare 3 overcapture Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC4OF: TIM Capture Compare 4 overcapture Flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of TIM_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus TIM_GetFlagStatus(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_FLAG)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_GET_FLAG(TIM_FLAG));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_FLAG(TIMx, TIM_FLAG));
+
+ if ((TIMx->SR & TIM_FLAG) != (u16)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the TIMx's pending flags.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_FLAG: specifies the flag bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - TIM_FLAG_Update: TIM update Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_COM: TIM Commutation Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_Trigger: TIM Trigger Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_Break: TIM Break Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC1OF: TIM Capture Compare 1 overcapture Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC2OF: TIM Capture Compare 2 overcapture Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC3OF: TIM Capture Compare 3 overcapture Flag
+* - TIM_FLAG_CC4OF: TIM Capture Compare 4 overcapture Flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ClearFlag(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEAR_FLAG(TIMx, TIM_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the flags */
+ TIMx->SR = (u16)~TIM_FLAG;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the TIM interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_IT: specifies the TIM interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_IT_Update: TIM update Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt
+* source
+* - TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of the TIM_IT(SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus TIM_GetITStatus(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ u16 itstatus = 0x0, itenable = 0x0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_GET_IT(TIM_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_IT(TIMx, TIM_IT));
+
+ itstatus = TIMx->SR & TIM_IT;
+
+ itenable = TIMx->DIER & TIM_IT;
+
+ if ((itstatus != (u16)RESET) && (itenable != (u16)RESET))
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TIM_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the TIMx's interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral.
+* - TIM_IT: specifies the pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - TIM_IT_Update: TIM1 update Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt
+* source
+* - TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source
+* - TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void TIM_ClearITPendingBit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_IT(TIMx, TIM_IT));
+
+ /* Clear the IT pending Bit */
+ TIMx->SR = (u16)~TIM_IT;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TI1_Config
+* Description : Configure the TI1 as Input.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+* - TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 1 is selected to
+* be connected to IC1.
+* - TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 1 is selected to
+* be connected to IC2.
+* - TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 1 is selected to be
+* connected to TRC.
+* - TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+static void TI1_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection,
+ u16 TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0, tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC1E_Reset;
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Select the Input and set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_CC13S_Mask & CCMR_IC13F_Mask;
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_ICSelection | (u16)(TIM_ICFilter << 4);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC1E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC1P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= TIM_ICPolarity | CCER_CC1E_Set;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TI2_Config
+* Description : Configure the TI2 as Input.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+* - TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to
+* be connected to IC2.
+* - TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to
+* be connected to IC1.
+* - TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 2 is selected to be
+* connected to TRC.
+* - TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+static void TI2_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection,
+ u16 TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr1 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC2E_Reset;
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ tmp = (u16)(TIM_ICPolarity << 4);
+
+ /* Select the Input and set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_CC24S_Mask & CCMR_IC24F_Mask;
+ tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_ICFilter << 12);
+ tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_ICSelection << 8);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC2E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC2P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= tmp | CCER_CC2E_Set;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1 ;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TI3_Config
+* Description : Configure the TI3 as Input.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+* - TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to
+* be connected to IC3.
+* - TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to
+* be connected to IC4.
+* - TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 3 is selected to be
+* connected to TRC.
+* - TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+static void TI3_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection,
+ u16 TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 3: Reset the CC3E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC3E_Reset;
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ tmp = (u16)(TIM_ICPolarity << 8);
+
+ /* Select the Input and set the filter */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_CC13S_Mask & CCMR_IC13F_Mask;
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_ICSelection | (u16)(TIM_ICFilter << 4);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC3E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC3P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= tmp | CCER_CC3E_Set;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : TI4_Config
+* Description : Configure the TI1 as Input.
+* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM
+* peripheral.
+* - TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+* - TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to
+* be connected to IC4.
+* - TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to
+* be connected to IC3.
+* - TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 4 is selected to be
+* connected to TRC.
+* - TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+static void TI4_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection,
+ u16 TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ u16 tmpccmr2 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 4: Reset the CC4E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC4E_Reset;
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ tmp = (u16)(TIM_ICPolarity << 12);
+
+ /* Select the Input and set the filter */
+ tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_CC24S_Mask & CCMR_IC24F_Mask;
+ tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_ICSelection << 8) | (u16)(TIM_ICFilter << 12);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC4E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= CCER_CC4P_Reset;
+ tmpccer |= tmp | CCER_CC4E_Set;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer ;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_usart.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_usart.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..baf9c47 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_usart.c @@ -0,0 +1,1001 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_usart.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the USART firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_usart.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* USART UE Mask */
+#define CR1_UE_Set ((u16)0x2000) /* USART Enable Mask */
+#define CR1_UE_Reset ((u16)0xDFFF) /* USART Disable Mask */
+
+/* USART WakeUp Method */
+#define CR1_WAKE_Mask ((u16)0xF7FF) /* USART WakeUp Method Mask */
+
+/* USART RWU Mask */
+#define CR1_RWU_Set ((u16)0x0002) /* USART mute mode Enable Mask */
+#define CR1_RWU_Reset ((u16)0xFFFD) /* USART mute mode Enable Mask */
+
+#define CR1_SBK_Set ((u16)0x0001) /* USART Break Character send Mask */
+
+#define CR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xE9F3) /* USART CR1 Mask */
+
+#define CR2_Address_Mask ((u16)0xFFF0) /* USART address Mask */
+
+/* USART LIN Mask */
+#define CR2_LINEN_Set ((u16)0x4000) /* USART LIN Enable Mask */
+#define CR2_LINEN_Reset ((u16)0xBFFF) /* USART LIN Disable Mask */
+
+/* USART LIN Break detection */
+#define CR2_LBDL_Mask ((u16)0xFFDF) /* USART LIN Break detection Mask */
+
+#define CR2_STOP_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xCFFF) /* USART CR2 STOP Bits Mask */
+#define CR2_CLOCK_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xF0FF) /* USART CR2 Clock Mask */
+
+/* USART SC Mask */
+#define CR3_SCEN_Set ((u16)0x0020) /* USART SC Enable Mask */
+#define CR3_SCEN_Reset ((u16)0xFFDF) /* USART SC Disable Mask */
+
+/* USART SC NACK Mask */
+#define CR3_NACK_Set ((u16)0x0010) /* USART SC NACK Enable Mask */
+#define CR3_NACK_Reset ((u16)0xFFEF) /* USART SC NACK Disable Mask */
+
+/* USART Half-Duplex Mask */
+#define CR3_HDSEL_Set ((u16)0x0008) /* USART Half-Duplex Enable Mask */
+#define CR3_HDSEL_Reset ((u16)0xFFF7) /* USART Half-Duplex Disable Mask */
+
+/* USART IrDA Mask */
+#define CR3_IRLP_Mask ((u16)0xFFFB) /* USART IrDA LowPower mode Mask */
+
+#define CR3_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xFCFF) /* USART CR3 Mask */
+
+/* USART IrDA Mask */
+#define CR3_IREN_Set ((u16)0x0002) /* USART IrDA Enable Mask */
+#define CR3_IREN_Reset ((u16)0xFFFD) /* USART IrDA Disable Mask */
+
+#define GTPR_LSB_Mask ((u16)0x00FF) /* Guard Time Register LSB Mask */
+#define GTPR_MSB_Mask ((u16)0xFF00) /* Guard Time Register MSB Mask */
+
+#define IT_Mask ((u16)0x001F) /* USART Interrupt Mask */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the USARTx peripheral registers to their
+* default reset values.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_DeInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ switch (*(u32*)&USARTx)
+ {
+ case USART1_BASE:
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case USART2_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case USART3_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case UART4_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART4, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART4, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ case UART5_BASE:
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART5, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART5, DISABLE);
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_Init
+* Description : Initializes the USARTx peripheral according to the specified
+* parameters in the USART_InitStruct .
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure
+* that contains the configuration information for the
+* specified USART peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_Init(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, USART_InitTypeDef* USART_InitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0x00, apbclock = 0x00;
+ u32 integerdivider = 0x00;
+ u32 fractionaldivider = 0x00;
+ u32 usartxbase = 0;
+ RCC_ClocksTypeDef RCC_ClocksStatus;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_BAUDRATE(USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_WORD_LENGTH(USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_STOPBITS(USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_PARITY(USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_MODE(USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_HARDWARE_FLOW_CONTROL(USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl));
+ /* The hardware flow control is available only for USART1, USART2 and USART3 */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_HFC(USARTx, USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl));
+
+ usartxbase = (*(u32*)&USARTx);
+
+/*---------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = USARTx->CR2;
+ /* Clear STOP[13:12] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR2_STOP_CLEAR_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure the USART Stop Bits, Clock, CPOL, CPHA and LastBit ------------*/
+ /* Set STOP[13:12] bits according to USART_StopBits value */
+ tmpreg |= (u32)USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR2 */
+ USARTx->CR2 = (u16)tmpreg;
+
+/*---------------------------- USART CR1 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = USARTx->CR1;
+ /* Clear M, PCE, PS, TE and RE bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure the USART Word Length, Parity and mode ----------------------- */
+ /* Set the M bits according to USART_WordLength value */
+ /* Set PCE and PS bits according to USART_Parity value */
+ /* Set TE and RE bits according to USART_Mode value */
+ tmpreg |= (u32)USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength | USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity |
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR1 */
+ USARTx->CR1 = (u16)tmpreg;
+
+/*---------------------------- USART CR3 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = USARTx->CR3;
+ /* Clear CTSE and RTSE bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR3_CLEAR_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure the USART HFC -------------------------------------------------*/
+ /* Set CTSE and RTSE bits according to USART_HardwareFlowControl value */
+ tmpreg |= USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR3 */
+ USARTx->CR3 = (u16)tmpreg;
+
+/*---------------------------- USART BRR Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Configure the USART Baud Rate -------------------------------------------*/
+ RCC_GetClocksFreq(&RCC_ClocksStatus);
+ if (usartxbase == USART1_BASE)
+ {
+ apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.PCLK2_Frequency;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.PCLK1_Frequency;
+ }
+
+ /* Determine the integer part */
+ integerdivider = ((0x19 * apbclock) / (0x04 * (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate)));
+ tmpreg = (integerdivider / 0x64) << 0x04;
+
+ /* Determine the fractional part */
+ fractionaldivider = integerdivider - (0x64 * (tmpreg >> 0x04));
+ tmpreg |= ((((fractionaldivider * 0x10) + 0x32) / 0x64)) & ((u8)0x0F);
+
+ /* Write to USART BRR */
+ USARTx->BRR = (u16)tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_StructInit
+* Description : Fills each USART_InitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure
+* which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_StructInit(USART_InitTypeDef* USART_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* USART_InitStruct members default value */
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate = 9600;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength = USART_WordLength_8b;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits = USART_StopBits_1;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity = USART_Parity_No ;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode = USART_Mode_Rx | USART_Mode_Tx;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl = USART_HardwareFlowControl_None;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_ClockInit
+* Description : Initializes the USARTx peripheral Clock according to the
+* specified parameters in the USART_ClockInitStruct .
+* Input : - USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 to select the USART peripheral.
+* Note: The Smart Card mode is not available for UART4 and UART5.
+* - USART_ClockInitStruct: pointer to a USART_ClockInitTypeDef
+* structure that contains the configuration information for
+* the specified USART peripheral.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_ClockInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CLOCK(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CPOL(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CPHA(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_LASTBIT(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit));
+
+/*---------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = USARTx->CR2;
+ /* Clear CLKEN, CPOL, CPHA and LBCL bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR2_CLOCK_CLEAR_Mask;
+
+ /* Configure the USART Clock, CPOL, CPHA and LastBit ------------*/
+ /* Set CLKEN bit according to USART_Clock value */
+ /* Set CPOL bit according to USART_CPOL value */
+ /* Set CPHA bit according to USART_CPHA value */
+ /* Set LBCL bit according to USART_LastBit value */
+ tmpreg |= (u32)USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock | USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL |
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA | USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR2 */
+ USARTx->CR2 = (u16)tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_ClockStructInit
+* Description : Fills each USART_ClockInitStruct member with its default value.
+* Input : - USART_ClockInitStruct: pointer to a USART_ClockInitTypeDef
+* structure which will be initialized.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_ClockStructInit(USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct)
+{
+ /* USART_ClockInitStruct members default value */
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock = USART_Clock_Disable;
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL = USART_CPOL_Low;
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA = USART_CPHA_1Edge;
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit = USART_LastBit_Disable;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_Cmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified USART peripheral.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* : - NewState: new state of the USARTx peripheral.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_Cmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected USART by setting the UE bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 |= CR1_UE_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected USART by clearing the UE bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= CR1_UE_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_ITConfig
+* Description : Enables or disables the specified USART interrupts.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt sources to be
+* enabled or disabled.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt (not available for
+* UART4 and UART5)
+* - USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt
+* - USART_IT_TXE: Tansmit Data Register empty interrupt
+* - USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt
+* - USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty
+* interrupt
+* - USART_IT_IDLE: Idle line detection interrupt
+* - USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt
+* - USART_IT_ERR: Error interrupt(Frame error, noise
+* error, overrun error)
+* - NewState: new state of the specified USARTx interrupts.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ u32 usartreg = 0x00, itpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00;
+ u32 usartxbase = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CONFIG_IT(USART_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_IT(USARTx, USART_IT)); /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ usartxbase = (*(u32*)&(USARTx));
+
+ /* Get the USART register index */
+ usartreg = (((u8)USART_IT) >> 0x05);
+
+ /* Get the interrupt position */
+ itpos = USART_IT & IT_Mask;
+
+ itmask = (((u32)0x01) << itpos);
+
+ if (usartreg == 0x01) /* The IT is in CR1 register */
+ {
+ usartxbase += 0x0C;
+ }
+ else if (usartreg == 0x02) /* The IT is in CR2 register */
+ {
+ usartxbase += 0x10;
+ }
+ else /* The IT is in CR3 register */
+ {
+ usartxbase += 0x14;
+ }
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ *(vu32*)usartxbase |= itmask;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *(vu32*)usartxbase &= ~itmask;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_DMACmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s DMA interface.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3 or UART4.
+* Note: The DMA mode is not available for UART5.
+* - USART_DMAReq: specifies the DMA request.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - USART_DMAReq_Tx: USART DMA transmit request
+* - USART_DMAReq_Rx: USART DMA receive request
+* - NewState: new state of the DMA Request sources.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_1234_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_DMAREQ(USART_DMAReq));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the DMA transfer for selected requests by setting the DMAT and/or
+ DMAR bits in the USART CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_DMAReq;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the DMA transfer for selected requests by clearing the DMAT and/or
+ DMAR bits in the USART CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (u16)~USART_DMAReq;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_SetAddress
+* Description : Sets the address of the USART node.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_Address: Indicates the address of the USART node.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_SetAddress(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u8 USART_Address)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ADDRESS(USART_Address));
+
+ /* Clear the USART address */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= CR2_Address_Mask;
+ /* Set the USART address node */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_Address;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_WakeUpConfig
+* Description : Selects the USART WakeUp method.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_WakeUp: specifies the USART wakeup method.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART_WakeUp_IdleLine: WakeUp by an idle line detection
+* - USART_WakeUp_AddressMark: WakeUp by an address mark
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_WakeUpConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_WakeUp)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_WAKEUP(USART_WakeUp));
+
+ USARTx->CR1 &= CR1_WAKE_Mask;
+ USARTx->CR1 |= USART_WakeUp;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd
+* Description : Determines if the USART is in mute mode or not.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - NewState: new state of the USART mute mode.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the USART mute mode by setting the RWU bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 |= CR1_RWU_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the USART mute mode by clearing the RWU bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= CR1_RWU_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig
+* Description : Sets the USART LIN Break detection length.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_LINBreakDetectLength: specifies the LIN break
+* detection length.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART_LINBreakDetectLength_10b: 10-bit break detection
+* - USART_LINBreakDetectLength_11b: 11-bit break detection
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_LINBreakDetectLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_LIN_BREAK_DETECT_LENGTH(USART_LINBreakDetectLength));
+
+ USARTx->CR2 &= CR2_LBDL_Mask;
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_LINBreakDetectLength;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_LINCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s LIN mode.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - NewState: new state of the USART LIN mode.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_LINCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the LIN mode by setting the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= CR2_LINEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the LIN mode by clearing the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= CR2_LINEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_SendData
+* Description : Transmits single data through the USARTx peripheral.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - Data: the data to transmit.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_SendData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_DATA(Data));
+
+ /* Transmit Data */
+ USARTx->DR = (Data & (u16)0x01FF);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_ReceiveData
+* Description : Returns the most recent received data by the USARTx peripheral.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* Output : None
+* Return : The received data.
+*******************************************************************************/
+u16 USART_ReceiveData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Receive Data */
+ return (u16)(USARTx->DR & (u16)0x01FF);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_SendBreak
+* Description : Transmits break characters.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_SendBreak(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Send break characters */
+ USARTx->CR1 |= CR1_SBK_Set;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_SetGuardTime
+* Description : Sets the specified USART guard time.
+* Input : - USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART
+* peripheral.
+* Note: The guard time bits are not available for UART4 and UART5.
+* - USART_GuardTime: specifies the guard time.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_SetGuardTime(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u8 USART_GuardTime)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Clear the USART Guard time */
+ USARTx->GTPR &= GTPR_LSB_Mask;
+ /* Set the USART guard time */
+ USARTx->GTPR |= (u16)((u16)USART_GuardTime << 0x08);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_SetPrescaler
+* Description : Sets the system clock prescaler.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* Note: The function is used for IrDA mode with UART4 and UART5.
+* - USART_Prescaler: specifies the prescaler clock.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_SetPrescaler(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u8 USART_Prescaler)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Clear the USART prescaler */
+ USARTx->GTPR &= GTPR_MSB_Mask;
+ /* Set the USART prescaler */
+ USARTx->GTPR |= USART_Prescaler;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_SmartCardCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s Smart Card mode.
+* Input : - USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART
+* peripheral.
+* Note: The Smart Card mode is not available for UART4 and UART5.
+* - NewState: new state of the Smart Card mode.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_SmartCardCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the SC mode by setting the SCEN bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= CR3_SCEN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the SC mode by clearing the SCEN bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_SCEN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_SmartCardNACKCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables NACK transmission.
+* Input : - USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART
+* peripheral.
+* Note: The Smart Card mode is not available for UART4 and UART5.
+* - NewState: new state of the NACK transmission.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_SmartCardNACKCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the NACK transmission by setting the NACK bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= CR3_NACK_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the NACK transmission by clearing the NACK bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_NACK_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_HalfDuplexCmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s Half Duplex communication.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - NewState: new state of the USART Communication.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_HalfDuplexCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Half-Duplex mode by setting the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= CR3_HDSEL_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Half-Duplex mode by clearing the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_HDSEL_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_IrDAConfig
+* Description : Configures the USART’s IrDA interface.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_IrDAMode: specifies the IrDA mode.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART_IrDAMode_LowPower
+* - USART_IrDAMode_Normal
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_IrDAConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_IrDAMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_IRDA_MODE(USART_IrDAMode));
+
+ USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_IRLP_Mask;
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_IrDAMode;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_IrDACmd
+* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s IrDA interface.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - NewState: new state of the IrDA mode.
+* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_IrDACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the IrDA mode by setting the IREN bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= CR3_IREN_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the IrDA mode by clearing the IREN bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_IREN_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified USART flag is set or not.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART_FLAG_CTS: CTS Change flag (not available for
+* UART4 and UART5)
+* - USART_FLAG_LBD: LIN Break detection flag
+* - USART_FLAG_TXE: Transmit data register empty flag
+* - USART_FLAG_TC: Transmission Complete flag
+* - USART_FLAG_RXNE: Receive data register not empty flag
+* - USART_FLAG_IDLE: Idle Line detection flag
+* - USART_FLAG_ORE: OverRun Error flag
+* - USART_FLAG_NE: Noise Error flag
+* - USART_FLAG_FE: Framing Error flag
+* - USART_FLAG_PE: Parity Error flag
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of USART_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_FLAG(USART_FLAG));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_FLAG(USARTx, USART_FLAG)); /* The CTS flag is not available for UART4 and UART5 */
+
+ if ((USARTx->SR & USART_FLAG) != (u16)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears the USARTx's pending flags.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+* - USART_FLAG_CTS: CTS Change flag (not available for
+* UART4 and UART5).
+* - USART_FLAG_LBD: LIN Break detection flag.
+* - USART_FLAG_TC: Transmission Complete flag.
+* - USART_FLAG_RXNE: Receive data register not empty flag.
+*
+* Notes:
+* - PE (Parity error), FE (Framing error), NE (Noise error),
+* ORE (OverRun error) and IDLE (Idle line detected)
+* flags are cleared by software sequence: a read
+* operation to USART_SR register (USART_GetFlagStatus())
+* followed by a read operation to USART_DR register
+* (USART_ReceiveData()).
+* - RXNE flag can be also cleared by a read to the
+* USART_DR register (USART_ReceiveData()).
+* - TC flag can be also cleared by software sequence: a
+* read operation to USART_SR register
+* (USART_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation
+* to USART_DR register (USART_SendData()).
+* - TXE flag is cleared only by a write to the USART_DR
+* register (USART_SendData()).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CLEAR_FLAG(USART_FLAG));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_FLAG(USARTx, USART_FLAG)); /* The CTS flag is not available for UART4 and UART5 */
+
+ USARTx->SR = (u16)~USART_FLAG;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_GetITStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the specified USART interrupt has occurred or not.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt source to check.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt (not available for
+* UART4 and UART5)
+* - USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt
+* - USART_IT_TXE: Tansmit Data Register empty interrupt
+* - USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt
+* - USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty
+* interrupt
+* - USART_IT_IDLE: Idle line detection interrupt
+* - USART_IT_ORE: OverRun Error interrupt
+* - USART_IT_NE: Noise Error interrupt
+* - USART_IT_FE: Framing Error interrupt
+* - USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of USART_IT (SET or RESET).
+*******************************************************************************/
+ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_IT)
+{
+ u32 bitpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00, usartreg = 0x00;
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_GET_IT(USART_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_IT(USARTx, USART_IT)); /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */
+
+ /* Get the USART register index */
+ usartreg = (((u8)USART_IT) >> 0x05);
+
+ /* Get the interrupt position */
+ itmask = USART_IT & IT_Mask;
+
+ itmask = (u32)0x01 << itmask;
+
+ if (usartreg == 0x01) /* The IT is in CR1 register */
+ {
+ itmask &= USARTx->CR1;
+ }
+ else if (usartreg == 0x02) /* The IT is in CR2 register */
+ {
+ itmask &= USARTx->CR2;
+ }
+ else /* The IT is in CR3 register */
+ {
+ itmask &= USARTx->CR3;
+ }
+
+ bitpos = USART_IT >> 0x08;
+
+ bitpos = (u32)0x01 << bitpos;
+ bitpos &= USARTx->SR;
+
+ if ((itmask != (u16)RESET)&&(bitpos != (u16)RESET))
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : USART_ClearITPendingBit
+* Description : Clears the USARTx’s interrupt pending bits.
+* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
+* - USART_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt (not available for
+* UART4 and UART5)
+* - USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt
+* - USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt.
+* - USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty interrupt.
+*
+* Notes:
+* - PE (Parity error), FE (Framing error), NE (Noise error),
+* ORE (OverRun error) and IDLE (Idle line detected)
+* pending bits are cleared by software sequence: a read
+* operation to USART_SR register (USART_GetITStatus())
+* followed by a read operation to USART_DR register
+* (USART_ReceiveData()).
+* - RXNE pending bit can be also cleared by a read to the
+* USART_DR register (USART_ReceiveData()).
+* - TC pending bit can be also cleared by software
+* sequence: a read operation to USART_SR register
+* (USART_GetITStatus()) followed by a write operation
+* to USART_DR register (USART_SendData()).
+* - TXE pending bit is cleared only by a write to the
+* USART_DR register (USART_SendData()).
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_IT)
+{
+ u16 bitpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CLEAR_IT(USART_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_IT(USARTx, USART_IT)); /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */
+
+ bitpos = USART_IT >> 0x08;
+
+ itmask = (u16)((u16)0x01 << bitpos);
+ USARTx->SR = (u16)~itmask;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_wwdg.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_wwdg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac9882f --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_wwdg.c @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ********************
+* File Name : stm32f10x_wwdg.c
+* Author : MCD Application Team
+* Version : V2.0.2
+* Date : 07/11/2008
+* Description : This file provides all the WWDG firmware functions.
+********************************************************************************
+* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
+* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME.
+* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
+* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE
+* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING
+* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
+*******************************************************************************/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f10x_wwdg.h"
+#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h"
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ----------- WWDG registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */
+#define WWDG_OFFSET (WWDG_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
+
+/* Alias word address of EWI bit */
+#define CFR_OFFSET (WWDG_OFFSET + 0x04)
+#define EWI_BitNumber 0x09
+#define CFR_EWI_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFR_OFFSET * 32) + (EWI_BitNumber * 4))
+
+/* --------------------- WWDG registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+/* CR register bit mask */
+#define CR_WDGA_Set ((u32)0x00000080)
+
+/* CFR register bit mask */
+#define CFR_WDGTB_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFE7F)
+#define CFR_W_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFF80)
+
+#define BIT_Mask ((u8)0x7F)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : WWDG_DeInit
+* Description : Deinitializes the WWDG peripheral registers to their default
+* reset values.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void WWDG_DeInit(void)
+{
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : WWDG_SetPrescaler
+* Description : Sets the WWDG Prescaler.
+* Input : - WWDG_Prescaler: specifies the WWDG Prescaler.
+* This parameter can be one of the following values:
+* - WWDG_Prescaler_1: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/1
+* - WWDG_Prescaler_2: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/2
+* - WWDG_Prescaler_4: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/4
+* - WWDG_Prescaler_8: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/8
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void WWDG_SetPrescaler(u32 WWDG_Prescaler)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_WWDG_PRESCALER(WWDG_Prescaler));
+
+ /* Clear WDGTB[1:0] bits */
+ tmpreg = WWDG->CFR & CFR_WDGTB_Mask;
+
+ /* Set WDGTB[1:0] bits according to WWDG_Prescaler value */
+ tmpreg |= WWDG_Prescaler;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ WWDG->CFR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : WWDG_SetWindowValue
+* Description : Sets the WWDG window value.
+* Input : - WindowValue: specifies the window value to be compared to
+* the downcounter.
+* This parameter value must be lower than 0x80.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void WWDG_SetWindowValue(u8 WindowValue)
+{
+ u32 tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_WWDG_WINDOW_VALUE(WindowValue));
+
+ /* Clear W[6:0] bits */
+ tmpreg = WWDG->CFR & CFR_W_Mask;
+
+ /* Set W[6:0] bits according to WindowValue value */
+ tmpreg |= WindowValue & BIT_Mask;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ WWDG->CFR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : WWDG_EnableIT
+* Description : Enables the WWDG Early Wakeup interrupt(EWI).
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void WWDG_EnableIT(void)
+{
+ *(vu32 *) CFR_EWI_BB = (u32)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : WWDG_SetCounter
+* Description : Sets the WWDG counter value.
+* Input : - Counter: specifies the watchdog counter value.
+* This parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F.
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void WWDG_SetCounter(u8 Counter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_WWDG_COUNTER(Counter));
+
+ /* Write to T[6:0] bits to configure the counter value, no need to do
+ a read-modify-write; writing a 0 to WDGA bit does nothing */
+ WWDG->CR = Counter & BIT_Mask;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : WWDG_Enable
+* Description : Enables WWDG and load the counter value.
+* - Counter: specifies the watchdog counter value.
+* This parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void WWDG_Enable(u8 Counter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_WWDG_COUNTER(Counter));
+
+ WWDG->CR = CR_WDGA_Set | Counter;
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : WWDG_GetFlagStatus
+* Description : Checks whether the Early Wakeup interrupt flag is set or not.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : The new state of the Early Wakeup interrupt flag (SET or RESET)
+*******************************************************************************/
+FlagStatus WWDG_GetFlagStatus(void)
+{
+ return (FlagStatus)(WWDG->SR);
+}
+
+/*******************************************************************************
+* Function Name : WWDG_ClearFlag
+* Description : Clears Early Wakeup interrupt flag.
+* Input : None
+* Output : None
+* Return : None
+*******************************************************************************/
+void WWDG_ClearFlag(void)
+{
+ WWDG->SR = (u32)RESET;
+}
+
+/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
|